Home

WGSD-10020 series - PLANET Technology Corporation.

Contents

1. JINONERERnE KS Y Y Y Y Y 9 9 Y Y TERR Hooooooo0o00 SJ LS LS LS 4 LS LS LS lt Sj S lt LSI LS LS lt LS lt S Figure 4 16 7 LLDP Configuration screenshot 314 4 16 7 PD Alvie check User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP PoE switch can be configured to monitor connected PD s status in real time via ping action Once the PD stops working and without response WGSD 10020HP is going to restart PoE port port power and bring the PD back to work It will greatly enhance the reliability and reduces administrator management burden This page provides you how to configure PD Alive Check The screen in Figure 4 16 8 appears Port Mode Enable 1 2 3 4 5 6 f 8 The page includes the following fields Object 192 168 0 10 192 168 0 20 192 168 0 30 poe confpd Ping PD IP Address Interval Time 10 300s Retry Count 1 5 Reboot Time 30 180 s Figure 4 16 8 PD Alive CHeck Configuration screenshot Description Mode Allows user to enable or disable per port PD Alive Check function As default value all ports are disabled Ping PD IP Address This coulumn allows user to set PoE device IP address here for system making ping to the PoE device Please be noticed that the PD s IP address must be set to the same network seg
2. PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual 8 Port Gigabit 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch gt WGSD 10020 WGSD 10020HP PT Prete ASS i EZ TP EFI l FTI www PLANET com tw User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Trademarks Copyright PLANET Technology Corp 2012 Contents subject to which revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual that
3. e DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64 e Trust Click to check if the DSCP value is trusted e QoS Class QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 9 DSCP Translation This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress The DSCP Translation screen in Figure 4 9 11 appears DSCP Translation ose ia Remap DPO mee DP1 O BE BE BE 1 1 vw A Iv 1 2 2 w O 2 w 2 w 3 3 Y F 3 w 3 wW 4 4 B O 4 w 4 w 5 5 O 5 5 B 6 6 w O 6 w 6 w 7 7 O 7 7 8 CS1 CSi O Csi amp Cs amp 9 9 vw F 9 w 9 w 10 10 vw O 10 vw 10 vw 11 11 S O ll B 1 B 12 12 O 12 12 M 13 13 v O 13 v 13 M 14 14 v O 14 v 14 vw 15 15 v O 15 M 15 w 16 CS2 CS2 O CS2 CS2 187 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series E3 AAA AAA AAA AAA n t Ww a CC 5 AIA QlIBGIQlSIS SISVlRIBlARlSlAIVIS ISBisiS Sisl SIBlIS BIS SIaAlAl Sl aS 9 AAA aaa aaa aaa aaa Sa n t Ww wW Sad es a alalSla
4. 1 11 31 5I 71 1 91 1101 Username Password Figure 5 1 Managed Switch Console Login screen For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter under console interface 317 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Configure IP address The SGSW Managed Switch is shipped with default IP address as following IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the Switch please use the procedures as follow i Show the current IP address 1 On WGSD 10020HP gt prompt enter ip configuration 2 The screen displays the current IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway As show in Figure 5 2 COM1 115200band Tera Term YT File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help go Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers WGSD 10020HP 21 41 6l 81 11 31 5I 71 1 91 1101 isabled IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address f e80 6082 cdb9 19ab cUeZ IPv6 Address IPv6 Pref ix ao 168 0 100 IPv6 Router WGSD 10020HP gt Figure 5 2 Show IP information screen a Configure IP address 3 On WGSD 10020HP gt prompt enter the following command and press lt Enter gt As show in Figure 5 3 WGSD 10020HP gt ip setup 192 1
5. 24 MS bits OUI Destination MAC type unicast multicast broadcast any Ethernet Type keyword Ethernet Type 0x600 OxFFFF or any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 and 0x86DD IPv6 LLC keyword Destination Service Access Point 0x00 OxFF or any Source Service Access Point 0x00 OxFF or any LLC control 0x00 OxFF or any SNAP keyword Protocol ID EtherType or any IPv4 keyowrd IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or any Source IP address a b c d n or any DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 or any specific range IPv4 frame fragmented yes nojany Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or any specific or port range Dest TCP UDP port 0 65535 or any specific or port range IPv6 keyowrd IPv6 source address a b c d n or any 32 LS bits QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification DP Level dp 0 1 default basic classification lt classified_dscp gt DSCP dscp 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 QoS QCL Delete Description Delete QCE entry from QoS Control list Syntax QoS QCL Delete lt qce_id gt Parameters 490 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID Default Setting disable Example Enable multicast storm control in 2fps WGSD 10020HP gt QoS Storm multicast enable 2 QoS QCL Lookup Description Lookup QoS Control List Syntax QoS
6. Show system version information Syntax System Version Example To display system version WGSD 10020HP gt System version Version Beta1109061425 Build Date 2011 09 06 14 27 40 0800 WGSD 10020HP gt User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series System Log Server Mode Description Show or set the system log server mode Syntax System Log Server Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable system log server mode disable Disable system log server mode default Show system Log server mode Default Setting disable 323 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example To show the log server mode WGSD 10020HP gt System log server mode System Log Server Mode Disabled System Name Description Set or show the system name Syntax System Name lt name gt clear Parameters lt name gt System name string 1 255 Use clear or to clear the string System name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign In CLI no blank or space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character and the first or last character must not be a minus sign clear Clear system name Example To set device title WGSD 10020HP gt System name WGSD 10020HP LAB System Contact Description Set or show the system contact Syntax System Contact lt contact gt clear Parameters lt cont
7. CIST Normal Port Configuration Restricted x A Path Cost Admin Edge Auto Edge peste BPDU Guard a 1 2 3 4 5 6 ff 8 9 Elo fee fee fede a 66 66 al E el lla lla KE E E E E E E E El Mo E oo0000000 0 2 66 68 j m a o a a a n o Figure 4 7 9 STP CIST Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e STP Enabled Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above 144 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e operEdge state flag Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices No Bridges attached Tra
8. Example Lookup SNMPv3 view entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp view lookup Idx View Name View Type OID Subtree default_view included 2 snmpv3_viwe included Number of entries 2 391 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Switch SNMP Access Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 access entry The entry index key are lt group_name gt lt security_model gt and lt security_level gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Add lt group_name gt lt security_model gt lt security_level gt lt read_view_name gt lt write_view_name gt Parameters lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt security_model gt any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security_level gt noAuthNoPriv None authentication and none privacy AuthNoPriv Authentication and none privacy AuthPriv Authentication and privacy lt read_view_name gt The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt write_view_name gt The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request m
9. No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users No users o Oo O O O O O O O O No users Security Network Psec Port Description Show MAC Addresses learned by Port Security Syntax Security Network Psec Port lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example 394 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Show MAC address learned on port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network psec port 1 MAC Address VID State Added Security Network Limit Configuration Description Show Limit Control configuration Syntax Security Network Limit Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show Limit Control configuration WGSD 10020HP gt security network limit configuration Port Security Limit Control Configuration Disabled Disabled Action Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 395 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Age Hold Time Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Security Network Limit Mode Description Set or show global enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable port security disable Globally disable port security default Show current global enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable E
10. PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet 547 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved f
11. Parameters lt timeout gt SNMP trap inform timeout 0 2147 seconds default Show SNMP trap inform timeout Default Setting 1 Example Set SNMP trap inform timeout in 20sec WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap inform timeout 20 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform retry times Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times lt retries gt 382 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt retries gt SNMP trap inform retransmited times 0 255 default Show SNMP trap inform retry times Default Setting 5 Example Set SNMP trap inform retry times in 10 WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap inform retry times 10 Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID Description Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap security engine ID probe disable Disable SNMP trap security engine ID probe default Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID Description Set or show SNMP trap security engine ID 383 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engineid g
12. Set or show LACP mode Syntax LACP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters 447 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LACP protocol disable Disable LACP protocol default Show LACP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable LACP for port1 4 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt lacp mode 1 4 enable LACP Key Description Set or show the LACP key Syntax LACP Key lt port_list gt lt key gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt key gt LACP key 1 65535 or auto Default Setting auto Example Set key1 for port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt lacp key 1 4 1 LACP Role Description Set or show the LACP role Syntax User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series LACP Role lt port_list gt active passive Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports active Initiate LACP negotiation passive Listen for LACP packets default Show LACP role Default Setting active Example Set passive for port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt lacp role 1 4 passive LACP Status Description Show LACP Status Syntax LACP Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP status of port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt lacp status 1 4 Port Mode Key Partner System ID Partner Port Dis
13. Set or show the HTTPS redirect mode Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Redirect enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs redirect disable Disable HTTPs redirect default Show HTTPs redirect mode Default Setting disable Example Enable HTTPs redirect function User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt security switch https redirect enable Security Switch Access Configuration Description Show access management configuration Syntax Security Switch Access Configuration Example Show access management configuration WGSD 10020HP gt security switch access configuration Access Mgmt Configuration System Access Mode Disabled 370 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series System Access number of entries 0 Security Switch Access Mode Description Set or show the access management mode Syntax Security Switch Access Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable access management disable Disable access management default Show access management mode Default Setting disable Example Enable access management function WGSD 10020HP gt security switch access mode enable Security Switch Access Configuration Description Show access management configuration Syntax Security Switch Access Configuration Example Show access management configuration WGSD 10020H
14. advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbor has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbors Because there is a risk that a LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbors it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility for that the neighbors has received the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission is repeated The recommended value is 4 times giving that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when a LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including between Network Connectivity Devices or to other types of links Description e Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator e Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to
15. disable Example Enable DHCP relay mode WGSD 10020HP gt security network dhcp relay mode enable Security Network DHCP Relay Server Description Show or set DHCP relay server Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Server lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address 414 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default Setting null Example Set DHCP relay server in 192 168 0 20 WGSD 10020HP gt security network dhcp relay server 192 168 0 20 Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode Description Set or show DHCP relay agent information option mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remote it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode disable Disable DHCP relay agent information option mode default Show DHCP relay agent information option mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode WGSD 10020HP gt security network dhcp relay information mode enable Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode When enable DHCP relay info
16. Allows user to set week day for defining PoE function should be enabled on the day e Start Hour Allows user to set what hour does PoE function enables e Start Min Allows user to set what minute does PoE function enables e End Hour Allows user to set what hour does PoE function disables e End Min Allows user to set what minute does PoE function disables e Reboot Enable Allows user to enable or disable whole PoE port reboot by PoE reboot schedule Please be noticed that if you want to PoE schedule and PoE reboot schedule work at the same time please use this function and don t use Reboot Only function This function offers administrator to reboot PoE device at indicate time if administrator has this kind of requirement e Reboot Only Allows user to reboot PoE function by PoE reboot schedule Please be noticed that if administrator enable this function PoE schedule will not to set time to profile This function just ony for PoE port reset on the indicate time e Reboot Hour Allows user to set what hour PoE reboots This function only for PoE reboot schedule e Reboot Min Buttons Save Click to save changes Delete Check to delete the entry Allows user to set what minute PoE reboots This function only for PoE reboot schedule Add new Rule click to add new rule 313 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 16 6 LLDP PoE Neighbours This page provides a statu
17. IEEE 802 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 7 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Full Duplex Trunk 1 999 999 1 000 000 200 000 100 000 50 000 2 000 000 1 000 000 500 000 200 000 100 000 50 000 Table 4 7 3 Default STP Path Costs 146 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 7 5 MSTI Priorities This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Priority screen in Figure 4 7 10 appears MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration CIST 128 w MSTH 123 v MSTI2 123 M MSTIS 128 MSTI4 128 MSTIS 128 vw MSTIB 128 MSTIZ 128 v Figure 4 7 10 MSTI Priority page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 6 MSTI Configuration This
18. IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Object Description e Country code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US e State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture e County County parish gun Japan district e City City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen e City district City division borough city district ward chou Japan e Block Neighborhood Neighborhood block e Street Street Example Poppelvej e Leading street direction Leading street direction Example N e Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW e Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Platz e House no House number Example 21 e House no suffix House number suffix Example A 1 2 e Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University e Additional location Additional location info Example South Wing info e Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn e Zip code Postal zip code Example 2791 287 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Building Building structure Example Low Library e Apartment Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 e Floor Floor Example 4 e Room no Room number Example 450F e Place type Place type Exam
19. QoS DSCP Map lt dscp_list gt lt class gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all default Show DSCP ingress map table i e DSCP gt class DPL lt class gt QoS class 0 7 lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 1 QoS DSCP Translation Description Set or show global ingress DSCP translation table If port DSCP translation is enabled translation table is used to translate incoming frames DSCP value and translated value is used to map QoS class and DP level Syntax QoS DSCP Translation lt dscp_list gt lt trans_dscp gt 486 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all default Show DSCP translation table lt trans_dscp gt Translated DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 QoS DSCP Trust Description Set or show trusted DSCP value which is used for QoS classification The DSCP value to be checked for trust is either translated value ifDSCP translation is enabled for the ingress port or incoming frame DSCP value if translation is disabled for the port Trusted DSCP value is onlyused for QoS classification Syntax QoS DSCP Trust lt dscp_list gt enable disable Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all enable Set DSCP as trusted DSCP disable Set DSCP as un trusted DSCP default Show DSCP Trus
20. The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave 156 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Non Member Leave Group Stop Timer Join Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Received Start Timer Report Received Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Figure 4 8 4 IGMP State Transitions Delaying Member Idle Member E IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service ES Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet 157 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 8 2 IGMP Snooping Configuration This page provides IG
21. User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Pot Auto refresh Fach Transmit Total Rx Packets Rx Octets Rx Unicast Rx Multicast Rx Broadcast Rx Pause Tx Packets Tx Octets Tx Unicast Tx Multicast Tx Broadcast Tx Pause Receive Size Counters Transmit Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Tx 64 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Receive Queue Counters Transmit Queue Counters Rx 00 Rx Q1 Rx 02 Rx 03 Rx 04 Rx 05 Rx 06 Rx Q7 Tx Q0 Tx Q1 Tx Q2 Tx 03 Tx Q4 Tx Q5 Tx Q6 Tx Q7 mooo000n0 de Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters Rx Drops Rx CRC Alignment Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Rx Filtered o Tx Drops Tx Late Exc Coll Figure 4 4 4 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 page screenshot The page includes the following fields Receive Total and Transmit Total Object Description e Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets e Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits e Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets e Rx and Tx Multicast The
22. WGSD 10020HP gt poe power_supply 100 PoE Status Description Show PoE status Syntax PoE Status 468 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 15 Thermal Command Thermal Priority Temperature Description Set or show the temperature at which the ports shall be shut down Syntax Thermal prio_temp lt prio_list gt lt shut_down_temp gt Parameters lt prio_list gt List of priorities 0 3 lt shut_down_temp gt Temperature at which ports shall be shut down 0 255 degree C Example Show thermal priority temperature WGSD 10020HP gt Thermal prio_temp Thermal Port Priority Description Set or show the ports priority Syntax Thermal port_prio lt port_list gt lt prio gt 469 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt prio gt Priority 0 3 Default Setting 0 Example Set thermal port priority in 2 WGSD 10020HP gt Thermal port_prio 2 Thermal Status Description Shows the chip temperature Syntax Thermal status Example Shows the chip temperature WGSD 10020HP gt Thermal status 470 Thermal Configuration Description Show thermal_protect configuration Syntax Thermal configuration 6 16 LED Power Command LED Power Timers Description Set or show the time and intensity for the LEDs Syntax led_power timers lt hour gt lt intensit
23. different keys cannot The default setting is Auto 103 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 5 3 LACP System Status This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances The LACP Status page display the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4 5 5 appears LACP System Status Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Key Last Changed Local Ports No ports enabled or no existing partners Auto Refresh CJ Figure 4 5 5 LACP System Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch stack The format is Switch ID Port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page imme
24. gt qos Port Policer Rate 1 10 1000 QoS Port Policer Unit Description Set or show the port policer unit Syntax QoS Port Policer Unit lt port_list gt kbps fps Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports kbps Unit is kilo bits per second fps Unit is frames per second default Show port policer unit Default Setting kbps Example Set the port policer unit in fps WGSD 10020HP gt q0s Port Policer unit 1 10 fps QoS Port Scheduler Mode Description Set or show the port scheduler mode Syntax QoS Port Scheduler Mode lt port_list gt strict weighted Parameters 478 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports strict Strict mode weighted Weighted mode default Show port scheduler mode Default Setting strict Example Set the port schedule mode in weighted mode WGSD 10020HP gt q0s Port Scheduler Mode 1 10 weighted QoS Port Scheduler Weight Description Set or show the port scheduler weight Syntax QoS Port Scheduler Weight lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt lt weight gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Weighted queue list or all default All weighted queues 0 5 lt weight gt Scheduler weight 1 100 QoS Port QueueShaper Mode Description Set or show the port queue shaper mode Syntax QoS P
25. lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_rv 1 Default Value 2 1 255 Robustness Variable default Show IPMC Interface Robustness Variable IPMC Parameter QI Description Set or show the IPMC Query Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter QI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_qi Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD 519 igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_qdi 1 Default Value 125 1 31744 Query Interval in seconds default Show IPMC Interface Query Interval IPMC Parameter QRI Description Set or show the IPMC Query Response Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter QRI mldligmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_qri Parameters mld igmp mid IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_qri 1 Default Value 100 0 31744 Query Response Interval in tenths of seconds default Show IPMC Interface Query Response Interval IPMC Parameter LLQI Description Set or show the IPMC Last Listener Query Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter LLQI mldligmp lt vid gt ip mc_param_Ilqi Parameters mlid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP 520 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_llgi 1 Default Value 10 0 31744 Last L
26. 4 Select Authentication tab 5 Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802 1X to enable 802 1x authentication 6 Select MD 5 Challenge from the drop down list box for EAP type 3COM 3C940 Properties General Authentication Advanced Select this option to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks Enable IEEE 802 1 authentication for this network EAP type Protected EAP PEAP MD5 Challenge Protected EAP PEAP Smart Card or other Certificate Authenticate as computer when computer information is available C Authenticate as quest when user or computer information is unavailable Figure 4 11 19 7 Click OK 8 When client has associated with the Managed Switch a user authentication notice appears in system tray Click on the notice to continue 257 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Local Area Connection 3 x Click here to enter your user name and password for the network Figure 4 11 20 Windows client popup login request message 9 Enter the user name password and the logon domain that your account belongs 10 Click OK to complete the validation process Local Area Connection 3 User name test Password eecceccces Logon domain Figure 4 11 21 258 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 12 Security This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch incl
27. Description Set or show the bridge instance priority Syntax STP Msti Priority lt msti gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt priority gt STP bridge priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default 128 Example Set MST1 priority value in 48 WGSD 10020HP gt stp msti priority 1 48 STP MSTI Map Description Show or clear MSTP MSTI VLAN mapping configuration Syntax STP Msti Map lt msti gt clear Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 Clear Clear VID to MSTI mapping Example Add MST1 priority value in 48 WGSD 10020HP gt stp msti priority 1 48 435 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series STP MSTI Add Description Add a VLAN to a MSTI Syntax STP Msti Add lt msti gt lt vid gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Add MST1 in vlan1 WGSD 10020HP gt stp msti add 1 1 STP Port Configuration Description Show STP Port configuration Syntax STP Port Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Example Show STP status of Port1 WGSD 10020HP gt stp port configuration 1 Port Mode AdminEdge AutoEdge restrRole restrTcn Point2point Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Auto 436 User s Manua
28. Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled 203 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row O Moves the ACE up the list Moves the ACE down the list O Deletes the ACE O The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs at regular intervals Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone Click to clear the counters Remove All Click to remove all ACEs 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Configure an ACE Access Control Entry on this page An ACE consists of several parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here The ACE Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 3 appears 204 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series ACE Configuration Any Y Action a Frame Type Rate Limi
29. Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Tag is removed Frame remain untagged Table 4 6 1 Ingress Egress port with VLAN VID Tag Untag table MI IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks 112 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 Customer A s LAN Headquarter Customer A s LAN Branch Office Q in Q VLAN Tunnel WGSD 10020 VLAN 1 20 VLAN 1
30. JV User cannot change password JV Password never expires Account is disabled lt Back Cancel Figure 4 11 17 Add User Properties screen 255 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Set the Ports Authenticate Status to Force Authorized if the port is connected to the RADIUS server or the port is a uplink port that is connected to another switch Or once the 802 1X stat to work the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server 4 11 10 802 1X Client Configuration Windows XP is originally 802 1X support As to other operating systems windows 98SE ME 2000 an 802 1X client utility is needed The following procedures show how to configure 802 1X Authentication in Windows XP Please note that if you want to change the 802 1x authentication type of a wireless client i e switch to EAP TLS from EAP MD5 you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first and add it in again Configure Sample EAP MD5 Authentication 1 Go to Start gt Control Panel double click on Network Connections 2 Right click on the Local Network Connection 3 Click Properties to open up the Properties setting window 3COM 3C940 Status General Support Connection Status Connected Duration 03 35 37 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity b dE 146 938 760 110 212 126 Sent Received Figure 4 11 18 256 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series
31. Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 e Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below 229 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e a Port based 802 1X a Single 802 1X E Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monit
32. Packets Dropped Other Info State Disable Round Trip Time 0 ms RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1813 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Responses Requests Malformed Responses Retransmissions Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Unknown Types Timeouts Packets Dropped 0 Other Info State Disable Round Trip Time 0 ms Figure 4 11 9 RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Servers The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4668 Name Description Rx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS Accepts ccessAccepts Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from the server Rx Access Rejects radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS 245 Tx Access Challenges Malformed Access Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Access 246 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series ccessRejects radiusAuthClientExtA ccessChallenges radiusAuthClientExt MalformedAccessRe sponses radiusAuthClientExtB adAuthenticators radiusAuthClientExtU n
33. Security Switch Access Delete tivo odo iii 374 Security Switch Access LOOKUP csovirocirnicirnrat svhostenaeeasiescebensyeapenenesareestubaenusteesebusteheessceesiveedbes cesatonse 374 Security Switch Access Cleary cia diia ore 374 10 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Switch ACceSs Statistics viii a iiaa 375 Security Switch SNMP Configuration ooooocccnonccnnoccccnononnncnnnoncnnnonn tnut no nn rn nano rra 375 Security Switeh SNMP Modes ici id 376 Security Switch SNMP VersiON oonoocccnnnoccccnonocnnononcnonononcnn nono cnn nnn nr rre 376 Security Switch SNMP Read Community c cccococccccoccccnononcncnononcno nono nono no nn n crono nn ran rra 377 Security Switch SNMP Write Community coooococnnococcnnnoncnononancnonono conan conc nono cnn rn n nn rre 377 Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode c icoiociinicoia tcp e 378 Security Switch SNMP Trap Version aeeie aeaee aaae nono nn e a rr nana 378 Security Switch SNMP Trap Community cccoooccninoncccnanoncnonononcno noc nc conan cnn nano rca ran n nn ran rre rre 379 Security Switch SNMP Trap DestinatiOD ooooooonnonccnnnnociccnonocnnononcccnnnonnnnnnno cnn nnon nn nro rr rra 379 Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination ooooooononcccnnoccconoccccnononnnc nano ncnnnorn nn canon rr rra rr rn 380 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure oooconnnnnnnnniccnnnonccononannnnnoncccnn nan r rr nono nar nrrn cnn rra 380 Security Switch SNMP Trap LINk Upii ce s cec
34. System Description System Capabilities Management Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 k REE ESAS ER EEES SIRS SKS KS KS CSCS CSCS dE E RAEE dadas a aga Figure 4 14 1 LLDP Configuration page screenshot 282 The page includes the following fields LLDP Parameters User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Object Description e Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval e Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds e Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be large
35. The default value is 1 e Port Type Show the VLAN Awareness for the port If VLAN awareness is enabled the tag is removed from tagged frames received on the port VLAN tagged frames are classified to the VLAN ID in the tag If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed e Ingress Filtering Show the ingress filtering for a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded e Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded e Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged e UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behavior at the egress side e Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not When a Volatile VLAN User 119 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between feature Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules e VLAN User AVLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships
36. The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an A
37. Voice VLAN OUI Clear Example Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry WGSD 10020HP gt voice vian oui clear Voice VLAN OUI Lookup Description Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Clear 508 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Lookup Voice VLAN OUI entry WGSD 10020HP gt voice vlan oui lookup Voice VLAN Port Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Port Mode lt port_list gt disable auto force Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disjoin from Voice VLAN auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically force Forced join to Voice VLAN default Show Voice VLAN port mode Default Setting disable Example Set auto mode for port 1 4 of Voice VLAN port mode WGSD 10020HP gt voice vian port mode 1 4 auto Voice VLAN Security Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Syntax Voice VLAN Security lt port_list gt enable disable 509 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Pa
38. e Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 16 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy Frames that hit the ACE are copied to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port copy operation is disabled e Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled e Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE e Counter a MAC Parameters The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Object Description e SMAC Filter Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MA
39. enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned VLAN setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness enable Enable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS RADIUS VLAN WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas radius_vian enable 405 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN Description Set or show either global enabledness and parameters use the global keyword or per port enabledness of Guest VLAN Unless the global keyword is used the lt reauth_max gt and lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt parameters will not be unused Syntax Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable lt vid gt lt reauth_max gt lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt Parameters global Select the global Guest VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port Guest VLAN setting default Show current per port Guest VLAN enabledness enable disable enable Enable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current Guest VLAN enabledness lt vid gt Guest VLAN ID used when entering
40. enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value appears Buttons Save e Ethernet Type Value Click to save changes When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OXFFFF but excluding 0x800 IPv4 Ox806 ARP and Ox86DD IPv6 A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value 212 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 4 appears ACL Ports Configuration Policy ID Rate Limiter ID Port Copy Logging Shutdown E lt o lt lt lt lt lt lt A 3 D 4 0 5 0 6 lv 0 7 0 8 D g D 0 D lt h E Figure 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 e Action Select whether forwar
41. frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 16 appears Storm Control Configuration Frame Type Enable Rate pps Unicast 1 O Multicast Fi Figure 4 9 16 Storm Control Configuration page screenshot 196 The page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Description e Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here unicast multicast e Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type e Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 14 QoS Statistics This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 17 appears Uv o gt zle x lS I amp O 100 Pd 100 107 de 100 ho 0000000000 50000000000 The page includes the following fields Queuing Counters 2 Pp 8 N 8 ww 2 pol a a e El x 7 x x E x oooooocooooo
42. private default_rw_group v2c public default_ro_group v2c private default_rw_group usm default_user default_rw_group Number of entries 5 Security Switch SNMP View Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 view entry The entry index key are lt view_name gt and lt oid_subtree gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Add lt view_name gt included excluded lt oid_subtree gt Parameters lt view_name gt Astring identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should excluded lt oid_subtree gt The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view Example Add SNMPv3 view entry 390 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp view add snmpv3_view include 1 Security Switch SNMP View Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 view entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 view entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp view delete 3 Security Switch SNMP View Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 view entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64
43. 2 2 IP Configuration The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill up the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screen in Figure 4 2 2 appears IP Configuration DHCP Client O IP Address 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 192 168 0 1 VLAN ID 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IP DNS Proxy Configuration Figure 4 2 2 IP Configuration page screenshot The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Object Description e DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup e IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation e IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation e IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation e VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 e DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation e DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server o
44. 20 MAN Service Provider Do WGSD 10020 MAN Edge Switch VLAN Tag Backbone Core Switch o Dir s s VLAN Tag VLAN Tag Tag VLAN Tag Tag VLAN 1 30 E VLAN Tag EP VLAN 1 30 WGSD 10020 MAN Edge Switch Customer B s LAN o Factory Customer B s LAN Headquater Q in Q VLAN Tunnel The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requir
45. 3 3 2008 EN 55024 2010 TEC 61000 4 2 2008 TEC 61000 4 3 2006 A1 2007 A2 2010 TEC 61000 4 4 2004 A1 2010 TEC 61000 4 5 2005 IEC 61000 4 6 2008 IEC 61000 4 8 2009 IEC 61000 4 11 2004 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer O Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Ph 2 Taiwan 3 Oct 2011 Place Date Legal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Y PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Conformi For the following equipment Type of Product WGSD 10020HP Model Number 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 2 100 1000X SFP Managed 802 3at PoE Switch Produced by Manufacturers Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic C
46. 347 MAG DUMP nisin he ee ee ee i He ee eee aes 348 MAG Statistics isinan nin ea i 349 MAC E basis roads 349 6 5 VLAN Configuration Command cnmmnccnccccnnnnnnn cr 350 VLAN CONTIGUA 5 A teeld Sipe he eel 350 MLAV PU ID ci ee ee eee 350 VLAN Frame Type die 351 VEAN Ingress File rito Oia tido gates 352 MAN Mode A A do 352 VLAN Link Type ios 353 VEAN QNO Mode sico a eo do e ale e e 353 NLAN Ethernet Type odriniti aa wen adh canybautashesteeesteeeeonsqueadh eit pbeeeadieasscunaseeadee 354 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series MILAN Adi aid 354 VEAN Forbidden Addict a Mes ear ete a a e ee e e 355 VEAN Delete noc mt see ss ada re calce elo e sele aloe see seo od 355 VLAN Forbidden Delete iia 356 VLAN Forbidden Lookups 00 A ee eed 356 VEAN LOOKUP ci ee Sd ve ee each RARE A ee i ee ah al te ed eae eto Red eae 356 VLAN Name AGG ze cscecceccstesateetepeeenee edheiaebenag eaae eiaa a ea aeaaaee eaea ieena penea e ana boine 357 VLAN Name Delete riciu en e a a settee eee aden 358 VLAN Name LOOKUp inina ei 358 AEAN NESI E O Ee o E A 359 6 6 Private VLAN Configuration Command sss sssssssnseunneunnnunneunnnunnnunnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennnen ennnen nnn 360 PVEAN Configuration eaa A edad cache sae a E aa A a 360 PULAN ANo Cis oe LA 361 PULAN Delete ccs Seed A ee eee aes 361 PVLAN LOOKUP iivsedesac chee tad 361 PVLAN Isolate icono a dt ts laca 362 6 7 SECURITY COMMA oss cocoa A A in 363 Security Switch User Conf
47. Console Port The console port is a DB9 RS 232 male serial port connector It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through the console port it provides rich diagnostic information includes IP Address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the attached RS 232 cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users an run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the startup screen of the device 32 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 2 2 Install the Switch This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps 2 2 1 Desktop Installation To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf please follows these steps Step1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch Step2 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source as shown in Figure 2 7 Figure 2 7 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop Step3 Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects When choosing a location please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in C
48. Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ 45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Sp
49. F E x oooooooocooo El x oooooocooooo F 3 x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EN O EN O E O E O eo E oO E Oo E o a o ao EN O E O E O E o EN OO OOOO a o a o o O A O A O A O AO 0000000000 E oO a o E o E o a Auto refresh C Figure 4 9 17 Queuing Counters page screenshot Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Q0 Q7 There are 8 QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue e Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue 197 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear _ clear Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 9 15 Voice VLAN Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI The Voice VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 18 appears Voice VLAN Configuration Traffic Class Nj Port Configuration lt 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 O SNS NSIS SSNS IS S
50. ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value Description e TCP UDP Source Filter Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears e TCP UDP Source No When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value e TCP UDP Source Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value e TCP UDP Destination Filter Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a spec
51. ID number appears e VLAN ID When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value e Tag Priority Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care E ARP Parameters The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected Object Description e ARP RARP Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag e Request Reply Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag e Sender IP Filter Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care 207 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specif
52. IEEE Name Description Rx Total dotixAuthEapolFrames The number of valid EAPOL Rx frames of any type that have been received by the switch Rx Response ID dot1xAuthEapolRespld The number of valid EAPOL FramesRx Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch Rx Responses dotixAuthEapolRespFr The number of valid EAPOL amesRx response frames other than Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch Rx Start dot1xAuthEapolStartFra The number of EAPOL Start mesRx frames that have been received by the switch Rx Logoff dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFr The number of valid EAPOL amesRx Logoff frames that have been received by the switch Rx Invalid Type dotixAuthInvalidEapolF The number of EAPOL ramesRx frames that have been received by the switch in which the frame type is not recognized Rx Invalid Length dotixAuthEapLengthErr The number of EAPOL 234 orFramesRx frames that have been received by the switch in User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Tx Total dot1xAuthEapolFrames Tx Tx Request ID dot1xAuthEapolReqldFr amesTx Tx Requests dot1xAuthEapolReqFra mesTx which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by the switch The number of EAPOL Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Request frames other than Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the
53. List screen in Figure 4 9 13 appears QoS Control List Configuration Action QCE Frame Type SMAC DMAC Class ao Refresh Figure 4 9 13 QoS Control List Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address e DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd The default value is Any e VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the 191 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series range 1 4095 or Any e Confict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may
54. MM O 1 O E O MN O 000000000 O BO el O 13 O eo 5O000000000 O 1 O MM O eo A O O G O a O EO O o o Auto refresh O Figure 4 14 5 LLDP Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Global Counters Object Description e Neighbor entries were lt also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also last changed on shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected e Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Entries Added e Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Entries Deleted e Total Neighbors Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full Entries Dropped e Total Neighbors Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Entries Aged Out Local Counters The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information 296 Object User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Description e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port e Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port e Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error e Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the
55. Polycom phones 3Com phones Siemens AG phones Voice VLAN Port Configuration 504 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Port Mode Security Discovery Protocol Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Voice VLAN Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN mode We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable Voice VLAN mode disable Disable Voice VLAN mode default Show flow Voice VLAN mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the Voice VLAN mode User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt voice vian mode enable 505 Voice VLAN ID Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN ID lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Default Setting 1000 Example Set ID 2 for Voice VLAN ID User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt voice vian id 2 Voice VLAN Agetime Description Set or show Voice VLAN age time Syntax Voice VLAN Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 10 10000000 default Show age time Default Setting 86400sec Example Set Voice VLAN age time in 100sec WGSD 10020HP gt
56. Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted e Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port e Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is 181 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps e Port Shaper Unit Buttons Save Click to save changes Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values i 4 9 6 Port Tag Remarking Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports The Port Tag Remarking screen in Figure 4 9 7 appears QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified 1 2 3 4 5 6 E 8 9 10 Figure 4 9 7 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarki
57. Restore full configuration Example To restore default value but not reset IP address WGSD 10020HP gt system restore default keep_ip System Load Description Show current CPU load 100ms 1s and 10s running average in percent zero is idle 328 Syntax System Load Example To show current CPU load WGSD 10020HP gt system load Load average 100ms 1s 10s 1 1 1 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 329 6 2 IP Command IP Configuration Description Show IP configuration Syntax IP Configuration Example Show IP configuration WGSD 10020HP gt ip configuration IP Configuration Disabled 192 168 0 101 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 253 0 0 0 0 1 Disabled IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 6082 cdb9 19ab c0e2 IPv6 Address 192 168 0 100 96 IP DHCP Description Set or show the DHCP client mode Syntax IP DHCP enableldisable 330 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters enable Enable or renew DHCP client disable Disable DHCP client Default Setting Disable Example Disable DHCP sever WGSD 10020HP gt ip dhcp disable IP Setup Description Set or show the IP setup Syntax IP Setup lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt lt ip_router gt lt vid gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt
58. The DHCP Relay Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 11 appears DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Relay Server Relay Information Mode Relay Information Policy Figure 4 2 11 DHCP Relay Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation e Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain e Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes Mode are Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remove it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation e Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay inform
59. The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 13 1 appears MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Configuration Disable Automatic Aging O Aging Time Port Members Lo Sail2 34 5161718 Auto 00000000 Disabled OOOOOOO Secure OOOOODOODOO Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members NA Derete vian 10 mac aadress 2 2 5 0 7 9 9 50 Figure 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields 276 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Object Description e Disable Automatic Enables disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries Aging e Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Range 10 10000000 seconds Default 300 seconds MAC Table Learning If
60. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing 289 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Streaming Vi
61. VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted in the stack e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 130 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 6 12 MAC based VLAN Status This page shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users The MAC based VLAN Status screen in Figure 4 6 18 appears MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static Static Port Members No data exists for the user Auto refresh C AA Mac address vian 10 1 2 3 4 5 5 gt e s io No data exists for the user Figure 4 6 18 MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLAN ID Indicates
62. White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight Through and Crossover Cable Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables into your network 537 ACE ACL User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series APPENDEX B GLOSSARY ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server
63. Windows My Network Places 4 2 8 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this page DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options m Circuit ID option 1 m Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on 59 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agent s MAC address
64. a aa vidoe i E eaa aia a 436 STP Eto nR o le lE E EEA EE de ATE E E A E A ATT 437 STP Poit Edge eiei eiii tae 437 SEP POmAUtO AGC ni ei 438 STP POPP AP rc he e o eel coo aE nA ee a a eo 438 SEP Port RestrictedRole cc TAE r E EAEE 439 STP Port Restricted T n ienee rne a a a a a e E e 439 STP Port bpd G ard nonini n A ei ate a a a aas 440 STP POM SUATISHIC is cecccs een eieren eaaa RA eaa daa aa ada pbeeeusucs E AAE EER eaea AE aaa Ena ea 440 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series STP Port Meheckiiiiii stcciveeesee ee ene tee casei ceed e aai e e iaaea d Videa aiae aeaiiai diea 441 STP MSTI Port Configurators knne cine 441 STPR MSTLPOM Cost onen e e ae seda dde a dde sele ais e lle o e el Ca 442 SIP MSTI Port Priority A it 442 6 9 Link Aggregation Command mnmmmnncccnnnnnnncnnninar rc 444 Aggregation Configuration iii A ee Ds 444 AggregatiOn Add iii iia 444 Aggregation Delete coimas tada ados elle 444 Aggregation Kolo 40 o tual ii a ta acted dea ade deans 445 Aggregation Mode ide 445 6 10 Link Aggregation Control Protocol COMMaANdO nccncccinnnnnnncncnnccnnnrrn rn 447 LACP Configuration iii a Selb ten 447 LACR Mode st A eons a ee Minn a e o 447 PAC PK Vico seen tects psc eee eh eae nal E eal at to dua teas lyst nat eterna das 448 PAG PS Oleo co tea dt Soe ohn he i ee a an dl his vn Sid Mo Aa Sel So de dond Aa edita MO E Sed 448 ACP Status RE 449 LACP Statistics 450 6 11 EL DP COMMANA ira e eaae a a araa as aE Eana 451 LLDP Conf
65. address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The SSH Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 5 appears SSH Configuration Mode Disabled v Figure 4 12 5 SSH Configuration screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation 265 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 6 Port Security Status This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all en
66. correct signature Detection 2 7 10 0 1 8 10 0 resistance of 15 33 kQ Classification Measure which power level class the resistor indicates 14 5 20 5 12 5 25 0 Normal operation Supply power to device 36 57 25 0 60 0 Line Detection Before power is applied safety dictates that it must first be ensured that a valid PD is connected to the PSE s output This process is referred to as line detection and involves the PSE seeking a specific 25 KQ signature resistor Detection of this signature indicates that a valid PD is connected and that provision of power to the device may commence The signature resistor lies in the PD s PoE front end isolated from the rest of the the PD s circuitries till detection is certified 531 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Classification Once a PD is detected the PSE may optionally perform classification to determine the maximal power a PD is to consume The PSE induces 15 5 20 5 VDC limited to 100 mA for a period of 10 to 75 ms responded by a certain current consumption by the PD indicating its power class The PD is assigned to one of 5 classes O default class indicates that full 15 4 watts should be provided 1 3 indicate various required power levels and 4 is reserved for future use PDs that do not support classification are assigned to class 0 Special care must be employed in the definition of class thresholds as classification may be affected by cable losses Classifying a PD according
67. destination IPv6 Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMPv6 packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes Buttons Start Click to transmit ICMP packets 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port After you press Test 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 3 appears Remote IP Ping Test Remote IP Address Ping Button 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test page screenshot ODO o fae Begs on ieee wo ee SQ V Vl Bl Vl Bl By Vl B The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings 302 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Remote IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes e Result Display the ping result 4 15 4 Cable Diagnostics This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected t
68. dhcp snooping statistics 1 Port 1 Statistics O Tx Discover O Tx Offer O Tx Request O Tx Decline 0 Tx ACK 0 Tx NAK O Tx Release O Tx Inform Rx Lease Query O Tx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned O Tx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown 0 Tx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active O Tx Lease Active 418 Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Description Show IP source guard configuration Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Security Network IP Source Guard Mode Description Set or show IP source guard mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IP Source Guard disable Disable IP Source Guard Default Setting disable Example Enable IP source guard mode User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt security network ip source guard mode enable Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IP Source Guard port 419 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series disable Disable IP Source Guard port default Show IP Source Guard port mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IP source guard port mode for port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt security
69. e Current Used mA The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using e Priority The Priority shows the port s priority configured by the user 311 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Port Status The Port Status shows the port s status e Total Show the total watts usage of all PDs Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 16 5 PoE Schedule This page allows the user to define PoE schedule The screen in Figure 4 16 5 appears Power Over Ethernet Schedule COIE Week Day Start Hour Start Min End Hour End Min Reboot Enable Reboot Only Reboot Hour Reboot Min Add New Rule PoE Schedule PoE Reboot 00h 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h 07h 08h 09h 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 19h 20h 21h 22h 23h 00h Figure 4 16 5 PoE Schedule screenshot Please press Add New Rule button to start set PoE Schedule function You have to set PoE schedule to profile then go back to PoE Port Configuration and select Schedule mode from per port PoE Mode option then you can indicate which schedule profile could be apply to the PoE port 312 The page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Description e Profile Set the schedule profile mode Possible porifles are Profile1 Profile2 Profile3 Profile4 e Week Day
70. each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is increment
71. group entry The entry index key are lt security_model gt and lt security_name gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Add lt security_model gt lt security_name gt lt group_name gt Parameters lt security_model gt v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security_name gt A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Add SNMPv3 group entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp group add usm admin_snmpv3 group_snmpv3 Security Switch SNMP Group Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 group entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp group delete 1 Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup Description 389 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Lookup SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 group entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp group lookup Group Name default_ro_group
72. in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows Neighborhood Network SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail The SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network dev
73. last entry currently displayed 4 8 14 MVR In multicast VLAN networks subscribers to a multicast group can exist in more than one VLAN If the VLAN boundary restrictions in a network consist of Layer 2 switches Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The alternative would be to use PIM or a similar protocol to route the traffic through a 171 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Layer 3 network it might be necessary to replicate the multicast stream to the same group in different subnets even if they are on the same physical network Multicast VLAN Registration MVR routes packets received in a multicast source VLAN to one or more receive VLANs Clients are in the receive VLANs and the multicast server is in the source VLAN Multicast routing has to be disabled when MVR is enabled Refer to the configuration guide at Understanding Multicast VLAN Registration for more information on MVR MVR is typically used for IPTV like services and is therefore usually only available on enterprise level switches Many manufacturers provide support for MVR on their high end switches The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them This page prov
74. made locally and revert to previously saved values 98 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 5 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed Duplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group a Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Link Aggregation 4 ports aggregate up to 4Gbps Figure 4 5 1 Link Aggregation 99 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The Link Aggregation
75. new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 12 ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration The ARP Inspection Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 12 appears 273 The page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series ARP Inspection Configuration COIE Port Mode Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled SN SNS NSIS Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled O 0 On OH amp WwW hm rae aera RIR Figure 4 12 12 ARP Inspection Configuration screen page screenshot Description e Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection e Port Mode Configuration Buttons Save Click to save changes Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 274
76. nn AnA rn nn rn rre 276 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status coocioici ii a at 278 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table iriiria niad nanena Eiaa nn AENEAN 279 4 134 Dynamic IP So rce Guard Table seision in 280 ANA ER AA A A 282 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery PrO O i a eE r ae AS non rr ae a rre rene errar 282 414 2 LLDP Configuration imene e e ea i i ann We A ei eel attests 282 4 14 3 LLDPMED Configuration ccoo iia non 285 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor cccccccececececeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeecaeceaeceaeceaeeeseseeeseeseeeeeseaeseaeseaesaaesaeesaeeseeeeseeesesereeeneaeeaes 291 A14 5 NGIGNDOM 2 tet eee rod o a o os e tado eee o es ie e ad ra a el le a e 294 4 14 06 Port Stati Stie S iira e aan ii a ieie te a ives Sedenl teense fees 296 41407 POrt StatiStics ii i atar 297 4 15 Network DiaQnOstics meiri einna trao tapaea aaao eaan ida 300 N51 e E 228 ee EA EE E E E L E od i 300 A E E ENE Sheet 301 4 15 3 Remote IP PING TeSt ridad 302 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 15 4 Cable Diagnostics vs oo ita 303 4 16 Power over Ethernet WGSD 10020HP ccccesceeeeeescceeeseneceeeseesecesesenceesesesceeseseseensesescensesseenenas 305 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device ooooocccinoccccconoccccnononcnonononcnnno tutkin tt nn nn nn n rre r rre 305 4 16 2 Power Configuration vita ad debia 306 4 16 3 Port COMU FEE cscs eee sencesndecdcdcete snesdudesdssdecseusscnepsdesashgessenectadsactedsasendaropeistdstec
77. not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releaseing the resource required by the QCE and pressing Refresh button e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column Buttons e Modification Buttons Refresh You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE 0 Moves the QCE up the list Moves the QCE down the list Deletes the QCE a The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL Click to refresh the page This will help to check the latest conflict status after releasing the resources 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 14 appears 192 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series QCE Configuration Port Members cata a eee eee ee wea Key Parameters Action Parameters psc DMAC Type Frame Type Fi
78. owe e e e Ow ww ww ww ew ww ew ee Y SS SS SS ee ee Ms ss e e ee e ee ee ee ee ee ee e e e e e o o eee eee a eee ee ee PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Untagged Tagged VLAN 2 VLAN 3 AS e s Figure 4 6 8 two separate VLAN diagram VLAN Group 1 1 Port 7 Port 10 N A VLAN Group 2 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 VLAN Group 3 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Table 4 1 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario described as follow E Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 1 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 1 the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will received the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 received no packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 a Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 5 While PC 3 transmit a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 enters Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 will received the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 6 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet a Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 124 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 1 While PC 4 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and PC 6 will rec
79. page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 11 appears 147 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series MSTI Configuration Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance Configuration Identification Configuration Name Configuration Revision MSTI Mapping MSTI LANs Mapped Figure 4 7 11 MSTI Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Configuration Identification Object Description e Configuration Name The name identifiying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters 148 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped e VLANs Mapped The list of VLAN s mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI A unused MSTI sho
80. priorities are supported Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 17 Web Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 20 appears Firmware Upgrade Browse Upload Figure 4 2 20 Web Firmware Upgrade page screenshot To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the folling 1 Click System gt Web Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 2 20 Browse 3 Click the button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware Upload 4 Select on the firmware then click W the Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status 5 Once the software be loaded to the system successfully The following screen appears The system will load the new software after reboot 70 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Firmware Upgrade in progess The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash The system will reboot after the Upgrade Until then do not reset or power off the device vV Completed Figure 4 2 21 Software successfully loaded notice screen DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the OK button after the image be loaded Or the sy
81. rr nnnn rn ran rra 416 Security Network DHCP Snooping ConfiguratiON oooooccccinnninnnnccccnononcncnonancnnnonncnnn non n rr naar cnn nn cn nn rr rr 416 Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode cooocccccocccccnnoccncnononcnonononononononcnnnn cnn rn nn nn naar rr rr rana 417 Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode ooococonoccccconoccnononononononnnnnnnn cnn rnnn cnn ano tetkin nt rre 417 Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics ooooonnncicnnnnnncnnnccccnnnonnncnonannnn nono ncnn no nor r nano rn nnrn cnn nr 418 Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration oonooccccnoniconoccccnononnncnonancnnnnnnncnn non n rr naar nn rn nn rre 419 Security Network IP Source Guard Mode coooocccccocccccononcncnononcnonono cocoa nn nc nono cnn ran n nn nan rr rra 419 12 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode ocococccnnoccccconoconononononononcnnnnnn cnn ron n nn nano rr rr narran 419 Security Network IP Source Guard Limit 0 0 eee ee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeesneeeeeeaeeseeenaees 420 Security Network IP Source Guard Entry eiieeii a nono conan nn nc nono cnn ia ia rr rra rre 420 Security Network IP Source Guard StatuUS oooooconnoncccnnnocccnonocnnonononcnnnon cnn nono cnn nano cnn nan nr r rre 421 Security Network ARP Inspection Configurati0N ooononnccnnoninonoccccnnnonnncnnnannnonono nc nn no nn r rro rn rn nn 421 Security Network ARP Inspection Mode o
82. s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 3 5 SNMP Based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public dali deals PC Workstation sate Bes with EEE SNMP application o o Ch C internet IP Address j intranet 192 168 0 100 IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 3 5 SNMP management 42 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web Based management About Web based Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web Based Management supports Internet Explorer 7 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth co
83. server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all ports e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set
84. shaper rate e g 800 Mbps 4 9 5 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers The Port Scheduler and Shapers for a specific port are configured on this page The QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shaper sscreen in Figure 4 9 6 appears 180 Queue Shaper Enable Rate Unit Excess O 6 6 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Pon QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Port Shaper Enable Rate Unit Figure 4 9 6 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Schedule Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port e Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth e Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted e
85. shut down when the actual power consumption for all ports exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver or if the actual power consumption for a given port exceeds the reserved power for that port The ports are shut down according to the ports priority If two ports have the same priority the port with the highest port number is shut down a Priority mode In this mode the user assign the priority to the ports PD When the total PoE power consumption request is over the allowed power supply limitation the system shut down PoE ports by port priority setting Ethernet Port Configuration This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings screen in Figure 4 16 2 appears Power Over Ethernet Configuration Figure 4 16 2 PoE Configuration screenshot User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e System PoE Admin Allows user enable or disable PoE function It will causes all of PoE ports supply Mode or not supply power e Power Management There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and Mode when to shut down ports Classification mode System reserves PoE power to PD according to PoE class level Allocation mode allows user to assign PoE power to per port Consumption mode System offers PoE power accordint to PD real power consumption Prior
86. specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically Forced Forced join to Voice VLAN e Port Security Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation e Port Discovery Protocol Buttons Save Click to save changes Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart auto detect process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 199 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 9 16 Voice VLAN OUI Table Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 9 19 appears Voice VLAN OUI Table 00 30 4f PLANET phones 00 03 6b Cisco phones 00 Of e2 H3C phones 00 60 b9 Philips and NEC AG phones 00 d0 1e Pingtel phones 00 e0 75 Polycom phones 00 e0 b
87. switch e Backend Server Counters These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Direction Name IEEE Name Description Rx Access dot1xAuthBackendAcce Challenges ssChallenges 235 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch receives the first request from the backend server following the first response from the supplicant Indicates that the backend server has communication with the switch MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the backend server for this port left most table or client right most User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Tx Other Requests Auth Successes Auth Failures Responses dot1xAuthBackendOther Requests ToSupplicant dot1xAuthBackendAuth Successes dot1xAuthBackendAuth Fails dot1xAuthBackendResp onses table 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the supplicant Indicates that the backend server chose an EAP method MAC based Not applicable 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the backend server 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a f
88. switch ports The Port DSCP screen in Figure 4 9 9 appears 183 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series QoS Port DSCP Configuration Port z ZRIRRIRRRR IREK HIRIEK IRR SEES OOOOOO0O0000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g 0 _ Auto refresh O Figure 4 9 9 QoS Port DSCP Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings e Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress m Translate Classify e Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox e Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values m Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification DSCPZ 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is 0 Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP m All Classify all DSCP e Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of m Disable No Egress rewrite Enable Rewrite enable without remapped m Remap DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value 184 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Sa
89. switching are integrated into one unit and delivered over a single cable It thus eliminates cost for additional AC wiring and reduces installation time 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The section describes how to use the Command Line interface CLI Section 6 CLI CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Command Line interface Section 7 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to does the switch operation of the Managed Switch Section 8 POWER OVER ETHERNET OVERVIEW The chapter introduce the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard and PoE provision of the Managed Switch Section 9 TROUBSHOOTING The chapter explains how to trouble shooting of the Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch 22 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 1 4 Product Features gt Physical Port E 8 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 M 2100 1000Base X SFP slots WN RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup E 8 Port10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ether
90. table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SSM Information Table 170 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD SSM Information Table The MLDv2 Information screen in Figure 4 8 16 appears MLD SSM Information Start from VLAN 1 and Group 100 with 20 entries per page PN more entries No more entries Auto refresh O Figure 4 8 16 MLD SSM Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny Buttons rl Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Lk lt Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the
91. the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Object Description e Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done e Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry 277 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved val
92. the link through that port is successfully established Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 31 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 2 1 3 Switch Rear Panel The rear panel of the Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket which accepts input power from 100 to 240V AC 50 60Hz Figure 2 5 amp Figure 2 6 shows the rear panel of these Managed Switches WGSD 10020 Rear Panel 50 60Hz Figure 2 5 Rear panel of WGSD 10020 WGSD 10020HP Rear Panel 50 60Hz Figure 2 6 Rear panel of WGSD 10020HP AC Power Receptacle For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world the Managed Switch s power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the range 100 240VAC and 50 60 Hz Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptalbe on the rear panel of the Managed Switch Plug the other end of the power cord into an electric service outlet then the power will be ready The device is a power required device it means it will not work till it is powered If your networks should active all the time please consider using UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will Power Notice prevent you from network data loss or network downtime In some area installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Managed Switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter HM
93. the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 267 4 12 7 Port Security Detail User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it Fora MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The Port Security Detail screen in Figure 4 12 7 appears Port Security Port Status Port 1 MAC Address VLAN ID Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Port 1 v Auto refresh O Figure 4 12 7 Port Security Detail screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address amp VLAN ID The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed e State Indicates
94. this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different 132 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of XX XX xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype 0x0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 Note special character and underscore _ are not allowed Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 6 14 Protocol based VLAN Mambership This page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for th
95. to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 e Max Reauth Count The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with 224 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 e Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Port Configuration The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Admin State If NAS is globally enabled this selection contr
96. to its power consumption may assist a PoE system in optimizing its power distribution Such a system typically suffers from lack of power resources so that efficient power management based on classification results may reduce total system costs Start up Once line detection and optional classification stages are completed the PSE must switch from low voltage to its full voltage capacity 44 57 Volts over a minimal amount of time above 15 microseconds A gradual startup is required as a sudden rise in voltage reaching high frequencies would introduce noise on the data lines Once provision of power is initiated it is common for inrush current to be experienced at the PSE port due to the PD s input capacitance APD must be designed to cease inrush current consumption of over 350 mA within 50 ms of power provision startup Operation During normal operation the PSE provides 44 57 VDC able to support a minimum of 15 4 watts power Power Overloads The IEEE 802 3af standard defines handling of overload conditions In the event of an overload a PD drawing a higher power level than the allowed 12 95 Watts or an outright short circuit caused by a failure in cabling or in the PD the PSE must shut down power within 50 to 75 milliseconds while limiting current drain during this period to protect the cabling infrastructure Immediate voltage drop is avoided to prevent shutdown due to random fluctuations Power Disconnection Scen
97. to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of MAC Based Authentication Unlike 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using static entries into the MAC Table Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authen
98. to user defined priorities The power budget is managed according to the following user definable parameters maximum available power ports priority maximum allowable power per port Reserved Power determined by There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports a Classification mode In this mode each port automatic determines how much power to reserve according to the class the connected PD belongs to and reserves the power accordingly Four different port classes exist and one for 4 7 15 4 and 30 8 Watts Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD Class Dsecription Default 0 44 to 12 95 Watts Classification unimplement Optional 0 44 to 3 84 Watts Very low power _2 Optional 3 84 to 6 49 Watts UN Optional 6 49 to 12 95 Watts or to 15 4Watts la Optional 12 95 to 25 50 Watts or to 30 8Watts High power 306 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series ga In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect Note a Allocation mode In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve The allocated reserved power for each port PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields The ports are shut down when total reserved powered exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver ga In this mode the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more power the available Note E Consumption mode In this mode the ports are
99. use of excess bandwidth disable Disable use of excess bandwidth default Show port queue excess bandwidth mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the port queue excess bandwidth mode WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port QueueShaper Excess 1 10 0 7 enable QoS Port Shaper Mode Description Set or show the port shaper mode Syntax QoS Port Shaper Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port shaper disable Disable port shaper default Show port shaper mode Default Setting Enable Example Enable port shaper mode WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port Shaper Mode 1 10 enable 481 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series QoS Port Shaper Rate Description Set or show the port shaper rate Syntax QoS Port Shaper Rate lt port_list gt lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt bit_rate gt Rate in kilo bits per second 100 3300000 Default Setting 500kbps Example Set the port shaper rate in 1000 WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port Shaper Rate 1 10 1000 QoS Port TagRemarking Mode Description Set or show the port tag remarking mode Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking Mode lt port_list gt classified default mapped Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports classified Use classified PCP DEI values default Use default PCP D
100. whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Adding Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e Age Hold Buttons Refresh If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 268 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this page The DHCP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 8 appears DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Disab
101. with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 288 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Object Description e Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save e Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports e Application Type Intended use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services
102. 0 Series Example Delete 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 in MAC based VLAN list WGSD 10020HP gt vel macvlan del 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 VCL Stasus Description Show VCL MAC based VLAN users configuration Syntax VCL Status combined static nas all Parameters combined static nas all VCL User VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Ethernet II Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN Ethernet lII protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Eth2 lt ether_type gt arpliplipxlat lt group_id gt Parameters lt ether_type gt arp ip ipx at Ether Type 0x0600 OxFFFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Add SNAP Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Snap lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h lt pid gt lt group_id gt Parameters lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h OUI value Hexadecimal 00 00 00 to FF FF FF 523 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt pid gt PID value Ox0 OxFFFF If OUI is 00 00 00 valid range of PID is from 0x0600 0xF FFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Add LLC Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Llc lt dsap gt lt ssap gt lt group_id gt Parameters lt dsap gt DSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt ssap gt SSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL
103. 00Base LX mini GBIC module 70KM SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 120KM SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm 10KM SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm 20KM SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1550nm 20KM SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm 40KM SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1550nm 40KM Fast Ethernet SFP Transceiver modules MFB FX MFB F20 MFB F60 MFB FA20 MFB FB20 SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 2KM SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 20KM SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 60KM SFP Port 100Base BX Transceiver WDM TX 1310nm 20KM SFP Port 100Base BX Transceiver WDM TX 1550nm 20KM It recommends using PLANET SFPs on the Managed Switch If you insert a SFP transceiver that is not supported the Managed Switch will not recognize it Before connect the other Managed Switches workstation or Media Converter 1 Make sure both side of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Bas LX to 1000Base LX 2 Check the fiber optic cable type match the SFP transceiver model gt To connect to 1000Base SX SFP transceiver use the Multi mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type To connect to 1000Base LX SFP transceiver use the Single mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type m Connect the fiber cable 1 Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver 2 Conne
104. 01 0002 PING6 server 2001 2 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 2 2 2 2 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad IP NTP Configuration Description Show NTP configuration Syntax IP NTP Configuration Default Setting IP NTP Configuration 335 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series NTP Mode Disabled Idx Server IP host address a b c d or a host name string 1 pool ntp org 2 europe pool ntp org 3 north america pool ntp org 4 asia pool ntp org 5 oceania pool ntp org IP NTP Mode Description Set or show the NTP mode Syntax IP NTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable NTP mode disable Disable NTP mode default Show NTP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable NTP mode WGSD 10020HP gt ip ntp mode enable IP NTP Server Add Description Add NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Add lt server_index gt lt ip_addr_string gt 336 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Example To add NTP server WGSD 10020HP gt ip ntp server add 1 60 249 136 151 IP NTP Server IPv6 Add Description Add NTP server IPv6 entry Synta
105. 08 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Class Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD Class Dsecription MIN Default 0 44 to 12 95 Watts Classification unimplement la Optional 0 44 to 3 84 Watts Very low power _2 Optional 3 84 to 6 49 Watts EJ Optional 6 49 to 12 95 Watts or to 15 4Watts 4 Optional 12 95 to 25 50 Watts or to 30 8Watts High power 4 16 3 Port Configuration Table 4 16 1 Device class This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings screen in Figure 4 16 3 appears PoE Mode Schedule AF AT Mode Maximum Power W Power Allocation W S SS SN SSIS Figure 4 16 3 Power over Ethernet Configuration screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e PoE Mode There are three modes for PoE mode Enable enable PoE function Disable disable PoE function Schedule enable PoE function in schedule mode e Schedule Indicates the schedule profile mode Possible porifles are Profile1 Profile2 Profile3 Profile4 e AF AT Mode Allows user to select 802 3at or 802 3af compatibility mode The default vaule is 802 3at mode This function wil affect PoE power reservation on Classification power limit mode only as 802 3af mode system is going to reserve 15 4W maximum for PD that supported Cl
106. 10020 Series 4 2 12 Detailed Log The switch system detailed log information is provided here The Detailed Log screen in Figure 4 2 15 appears Detailed System Log Information ol Message Level Info Time Message Switch just made a cool boot Figure 4 2 15 Detailed Log page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone Lk lt Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed a Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID 65 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 2 13 Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page The Remote Syslog screen in Figure 4 2 16 appears System Log Configuration Server Address Syslog Level Figure 4 2 16 Remote Syslog page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will n
107. 15 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 6 5 VLAN Membership E Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index The VLAN membership configuration for the selected stack switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 255 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN The VLAN Membership screen in Figure 4 6 3 appears VLAN Membership Configuration Start from WLAN i with 20 entries per page Port Members O ATT peiete wianio viannome a 2 8 5 6 7 8 9 i0 Pot A default MIMIMIMIMIMIMIMIM A Add new entry Figure 4 6 3 VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on all stack switch units during the next Save VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN VLAN Name Indicates the name of the VLAN Maximum length of the VLAN Name String is 32 VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet VLAN name can be edited for the existing VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the p
108. 65535 or any lt dport gt Destination UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any tcp TCP keyword lt tcp_flags gt TCP flags fin syn rst psh ack urg 0 1 any permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt _ Port list for copy of frames or disable lt mirror gt Mirror of frames enable disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Security Network ACL Delete Description Delete ACE 411 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Syntax Security Network ACL Delete lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 256 Example Delete ACE 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network acl delete 1 Security Network ACL Lookup Description Show ACE default All ACEs Syntax Security Network ACL Lookup lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 256 Example Lookup ACE 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network acl lookup 1 Security Network ACL Clear Description Clear all ACL counters Syntax Security Network ACL Clear Example Clear all ACL counters WGSD 10020HP gt security network acl clear 412 Security Network ACL Status Description Show ACL status Syntax User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network ACL Status combined static dhcp upnp arp_inspect
109. 68 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series be transmitted Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 16 Thermal Protection This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current setting for controlling thermal protection Thermal protection is used to protect the chip from getting overheated When the temperature exceeds the configured thermal protection temperature ports will be turned off in order to decrease the power consumption It is possible to arrange the ports with different priorities Each priority can be given a temperature at which the corresponding ports shall be turned off The Thermal Protection screen in Figure 4 2 19 appears Thermal Protection Configuration Temperature settings for priority groups Port priorities o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt 2 3 4 5 6 Ov 7 8 9 0 o lt Figure 4 2 19 Thermal Protection Configuration page screenshot 69 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Temperature settings The temperature at which the ports with the corresponding priority will be turned for priority groups off Temperatures between 0 and 255 C are supported e Port priorities The priority the port belongs to 4
110. 68 0 101 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 253 1 The previous command would apply the follow settings for the Switch IP 192 168 0 101 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 0 253 VLAN ID 1 318 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series COM1 115200band Tera Term YT File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers WGSD 10020HP 21 41 6l 8l l 11 3I 51 7l 1 91 1101 admin n in progress A Hegi 10020HP gt ip conf iguration IP Configuration DNS Server VLAN_ ID DNS Proxy A IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe amp d 6082 cdb9 19ab cUeZ IPv6 Address 192 168 0 100 IPv6 Pref ix 56 Figure 5 3 Set IP address screen 4 Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed If the IP address is successfully configured the Managed Switch will apply the new IP address setting immediately You can access the Web interface of Managed Switch through the new IP address If you do not familiar with console command or the related parameter enter help anytime in console to get the help description You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of t
111. 8 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client a Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the
112. ADIUS Server setting 252 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 The shared secret key should be as same as the key configured on the Managed Switch New RADIUS Client RADIUS Standard ha Figure 4 11 13 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting 253 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 5 Configure ports attribute of 802 1X the same as 802 1X Port Configuration RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest Admin State QoS Enabled VLAN Enabled LAN Enabled Port State 1 Porthesed 802 1 w O O O 2 Portbased 802 1X vw O O O Globally Disabled Fesuthenticate Globally Disabled authenticate Reinitializ Figure 4 11 14 802 1x Port Configuration 6 Create user data The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC For example the Radius Server founded on Win2003 Server and then e gt a5 Shortcut to Network Security sE Active Directory Domains and Trusts Configurati ig Active Directory Sites and Services Direct Users ation Authority E Cluster Administrator er My Cor gt Component Services a Computer Management gt Control 4 Configure Your Server Wizard zs Pas Data Sources ODBC Hd Adminis e Distributed File System mo gt a Printers DNS 6 Domain Controller Security Policy Y Help an fil Domain Security Policy f Event Viewer gt aa Internet Authentication Service Windows Catalog G I
113. All ports enable Enable port disable Disable port default Show administrative mode Default Setting Enable Example Disable port User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt port state 1 disable Port Maximum Frame Description Set or show the port maximum frame size Syntax Port MaxFrame lt port_list gt lt max_frame gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt max_frame gt Port maximum frame size 1518 9600 default Show maximum frame size Default Setting 9600 Example Set 2048 frame size for port1 WGSD 10020HP gt port maxframe 1 2048 341 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Port Power Description Set or show the port PHY power mode Syntax Port Power lt port_list gt enable disable actiphy dynamic Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable all power control disable Disable all power control actiphy Enable ActiPHY power control dynamic Enable Dynamic power control Default Setting disable Example Disable port power function for port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt port power 1 4 enable Port Excessive Description Set or show the port excessive collision mode Syntax Port Excessive lt port_list gt discard restart Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports discard Discard frame after 16 collisions restart Restart ba
114. Authentication Configuration This page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces The Authentication Method Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 3 appears Authentication Method Configuration Authentication Method Fallback console telnet ssh Figure 4 11 3 Authentication Method Configuration page screenshot 220 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values None authentication is disabled and login is not possible local use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication radius use a remote RADIUS server for authentication tacacs use a remote TACACS server for authentication e Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to something else than none or local Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 11 3 Network Access Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1
115. Auto Default Value STP disabled for all ports 128 0 32 768 138 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will Occur Note Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocki
116. By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802 3az 541 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G 8031 Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree fo
117. C configurable the switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of areceived BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports STP calculates path costs and selects the 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet path with the minimum cost as the active ports path Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Enable state Port priority Port cost Bridge Priority User Changeable STA Parameters 0
118. C address of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields clear Flushes all dynamic entries Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt e Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by IP address and then by IP mask The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 13 4 appears Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Start from Portl w YLAN 1 and IP address 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page LAN ID IP Address MAC Address No more entries Auto refresh O Figure 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table 280 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The Start fro
119. C address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears e SMAC Value When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value e DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears 206 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e DMAC Value When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value VLAN Parameters Object Description e 802 1Q Tagged Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802 1Q tagged The allowed values are Any Any value is allowed don t care Enabled Tagged frame only Disabled Untagged frame only The default value is Any e VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN
120. D An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy 83 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible Protocol authentication protocol are None None authentication protocol MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For MD5 authentication Password protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 F
121. EI values mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level default Show port tag remarking mode Default Setting classified Example Set the port tag remarking mode in mapped 482 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port TagRemarking Mode 1 10 mapped QoS Port TagRemarking PCP Description Set or show the default PCP This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to default Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking PCP lt port_list gt lt pcp gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default PCP in 1 WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port TagRemarking PCP 1 10 1 QoS Port TagRemarking DEI Description Set or show the default DEI This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to default Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking DEI lt port_list gt lt dei gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 Default Setting 0 Example 483 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Set the default EDI in 1 WGSD 10020HP gt q0s Port TagRemarking EDI 1 10 1 QoS Port TagRemarking Map Description Set or show the port tag remarking map This map is used when port tag remarking mode is set to mapped and the purpose is to translate the classified QoS class 0 7 and DP leve
122. Filtering Group Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 11 MLD Snooping Status This page provides MLD Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 14 appears 168 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series MLD Snooping Status Statistics Status O 07520002 UN 1 Auto refresh O Figure 4 8 14 MLD Snooping Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Querier Transmit The number of Transmitted Querier e Querier Receive The number of Received Querier e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports e V1 Leave Received The number of Received V1 Leaves Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear c J Clears all Statistics counters 169 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 8 12 MLD Group Information Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this page The MLD Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 s
123. LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out e TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded e TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value e Org Discarded The number of organizationally TLVs received e Age Outs Buttons Refresh Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Click to refresh the page immediately clear Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon reboot 4 14 7 Port Statistics By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency This latency occurs due to that the circuits EEE turn off to save power need time to boot up before sending traffic over the link This time is called wakeup time To achieve minimal latency devices can use LLDP to exchan
124. Load configuration from TFTP server Syntax Config Load lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt check Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name check Check configuration file only default Check and apply file 495 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 20 Firmware Command Firmware Load Description Load new firmware from TFTP server Syntax Firmware Load lt ip_addr_string gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt file_name gt Firmware file name Firmware IPv6 Load Description Load new firmware from IPv6 TFTP server Syntax Firmware IPv6 Load lt ipv6_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ipv6_server gt TFTP server IPv6 address lt file_name gt Firmware file name Firmware Information Description Display information about active and alternate firmware images Syntax Firmware Information Firmware Swap Description 496 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Activate the alternate firmware image Syntax Firmware Swap 497 6 21 UPnP Command UPnP Configuration Description Show UPnP configuration Syntax UPnP Configuration Example Show UPnP configuration WGSD 10020HP gt upnp configuration UPnP Configuration Disabled 4 UPnP Advertising Duration 100 UP
125. MP Snooping related configuration The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 5 appears IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled O Unregistered IPMC Flooding Enabled Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled O Port Related Configuration 1 unlimited Y unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited OOOOOO00000 OOOOO0O00000 F R R eek 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 h Figure 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping Unregistered IPMC Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMC traffic flooding Leave Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port 158 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Throtting Enable to limit the numb
126. N Access Point Router Telephone DOCSIS cable device Station only Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by e Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 295 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 14 6 Port Statistics This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch The LLDP Statistics screen in Figure 4 14 5 appears Global Counters Neighbour entries were last changed at 623 sec ago Total Neighbours Entries Added 0 Total Neighbours Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbours Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out 0 LLDP Statistics Local Counters Local Port Tx Frames Rx Frames Rx Errors Frames Discarded TL s Discarded TLYs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs gt oO 2 3 4 5 6 i 8 9 E O E O E O E O Ot O E O EO ey O O
127. N Name Lookup Description Show VLAN Name table Syntax VLAN Name Lookup lt name gt Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet Example To show VLAN Name table WGSD 10020HP gt vlan name lookup vid 358 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series VLAN Status Description VLAN Port Configuration Status Syntax VLAN Status lt port_list gt combined static nas mvr voice_vlan mstp all conflicts Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports combined combined VLAN Users configuration static static port configuration nas NAS port configuration mvr MVR port configuration voice_vlan Voice VLAN port configuration mstp MSTP port configuration all All VLAN Users configuration default combined VLAN Users configuration Default Setting Promiscous Example Show VLAN configuration of port10 WGSD 10020HP gt status 1 Port VLAN User PortType PVID Frame Type Ing Filter Tx Tag Static Unaware Disabled Untag This NAS Voice VLAN Combined Unaware Disabled Untag This 1 359 6 6 Private VLAN Configuration Command U Description Show Private VLAN configuration Syntax PVLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show private
128. Non STP Forwarding Auto refresh C Figure 4 7 14 STP Port Status page screenshot 5 3 4 5 6 l 8 9 0 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role The current STP port role of the ICST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort BackupPort RootPort DesignatedPort e State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Disabled Blocking Learning 151 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Forwarding Non STP e Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately FI Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 7 9 Port Statistics This page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 7 15 appears STP Statistics No ports enabled Auto refresh C Figure 4 7 15 STP Statistics page screenshot SN ste este sre ren ste este ste Tc unknown megar No ports enabled O S U O The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port e MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port
129. P gt security switch access configuration Access Mgmt Configuration 371 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series System Access Mode Disabled W WEB HTTPS S SNMP T TELNET SSH End IP Address Security Switch Access Mode Description Set or show the access management mode Syntax Security Switch Access Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable access management disable Disable access management default Show access management mode Default Setting disable Example Enable switch access mode WGSD 10020HP gt security switch access mode enable Security Switch Access Add Description Add access management entry default Add all supported protocols Syntax Security Switch Access Add lt access_id gt lt start_ip_addr gt lt end_ip_addr gt web snmp telnet Parameters 372 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ip_addr gt Start IP address a b c d lt end_ip_addr gt End IP address a b c d web Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS snmp Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP telnet Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH Example Add access management list from 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 0 200 via web interface Security Switch Access IPv6 Add Description Add access management IPv6 entry default Add all supported protocols Syn
130. PVID tagging is implemented Tagging 4 6 4 VLAN Port Configuration This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch E IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged e Untagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Frame Income
131. Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set all of MAC statistics User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series MAC Flush Description Flush all learned entries Syntax MAC Flush 349 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 5 VLAN Configuration Command VLAN Configuration Description Show VLAN configuration Syntax VLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show VLAN status of port1 WGSD 10020HP gt vlan configuration 1 VLAN Configuration Mode IEEE 802 1Q Port PVID IngrFilter FrameType LinkType Q in Q Mode Eth type Disabled All UnTag Disable N A VID VLAN Name VLAN forbidden table is empty VLAV PVID Description Set or show the port VLAN ID 350 Syntax VLAN PVID lt port_list gt lt vid gt none Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt vid gt none Port VLAN ID 1 4095 or none default Show port VLAN ID Default Setting 1 Example Set PVID2 for port10 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt vlan pvid 10 2 VLAN Frame Type Description Set or show the port VLAN frame type Syntax VLAN FrameType lt port_list gt all tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports all Allow tagged and untagged frames tagged Allow tagged
132. Power over Ethernet PLUS RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 RFC 3376 IGMP version 3 RFC 2710 MLD version 1 FRC 3810 MLD version 2 28 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount For easier management and control of the Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch please read this chapter completely 2 1 Hardware Description 2 1 1 Switch Front Panel The unit front panel provides a simple interface monitoring the switch Figure 2 1 amp Figure 2 2 show the front panel of the Managed Switches WGSD 10020 Front Panel pr 2 4 6 8 10 Port Gigabit Managed Switch H r o rO earnest mets 3 8 a E Figure 2 1 WGSD 10020 front panel WGSD 10020HP Front Panel CTE IER 802 3at PoE ETE R WGSD 10020HP Figure 2 2 WGSD 10020HP front panel Gigabit TP interface 10 100 1000Base T Copper RJ 45 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters M SFP slots 100 1000Base X mini GBIC slot SFP Small Factor Pluggable transceiver module From 550 meters Multi mode fiber up to 10 30 50 70 120 kilometers Single mode fiber E Reset button At the left of f
133. Protocol based VLAN Delete Ethernet ll Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN Ethernet l protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Eth2 lt ether_type gt arp ip ipx at Parameters lt ether_type gt arp ip ipx at Ether Type 0x0600 OxFFFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete SNAP Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Snap lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h lt pid gt Parameters lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h OUI value Hexadecimal 00 00 00 to FF FF FF 524 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt pid gt PID value Ox0 OxFFFF If OUI is 00 00 00 valid range of PID is from 0x0600 0xF FFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete LLC Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Llc lt dsap gt lt ssap gt Parameters lt dsap gt DSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt ssap gt SSAP value 0x00 OxFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN group to VLAN mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Add lt port_list gt lt group_id gt lt vid gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt group_id gt Protocol group ID lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN group to VLAN mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Vla
134. QCL Lookup lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID Default Setting disable Example Enable multicast storm control in 2fps WGSD 10020HP gt QoS Storm multicast enable 2 QoS QCL Status Description Show QCL status This can be used to display if there is any conflict in QCE for differnet user types Syntax QoS QCL status combined static voice_vlan conflicts Parameters combined static voice_vlan conflicts combined Shows the combined status 491 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series static Shows the static user configured status voice_vlan Shows the status by Voice VLAN conflicts Shows all conflict status default Shows the combined status QoS QCL Refresh Description Resolve QCE conflict status Same H W resource is shared by multiple applications and it may not be available even before MAX QCE entry So user can release the resource in use by other applications and use this command to acquire the resource Syntax QoS QCL refresh Parameters combined static voice_vlan conflicts combined Shows the combined status static Shows the static user configured status voice_vlan Shows the status by Voice VLAN conflicts Shows all conflict status default Shows the combined status Default Setting disable Example Enable multicast storm control in 2fps WGSD 10020HP gt QoS Storm multicast enable 2 492 User s Manu
135. QOS Port Scheduler Mode useisiin ikeir dido 478 QOS Por Scheduler Weight sicario aiena 479 15 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series QoS Port QueueShaper Mode cc ldnee dunce iiiaio idad Tedde aded ieu diad aana daii 479 QoS Port QueueShaper Rate oooooccccoccccocccconcconcnononcnonnnnnoncnnnn R aA EA a Ea aE EAE OAE ANE AES AS AS aina 480 QOS Port Q ueueShaper Excess diie a ias 480 QoS Port Shaper Mode E EAEE TA ETTA E E 481 QoS Port Shaper Rate ipno n ele el oe ite AEE 482 QoS Port TagRemarking Mode parrain r soon ek penton sdb lote 482 QoS Port TagRemarking POP usina torreta 483 QoS Port Tagremarking DE ici idear 483 QoS Port TagRemarking Map ta 484 Q0S Port DSCP Translation dei erica 484 QoS Port DSCP Classification iii 485 QoS Port DSCP EgressRematk cccccccceceeeseeceeeeeeaeeceeeeeeaaeeeaeeeeaaecaeeeeaaecaeeeeaaeceaeeeeaaeseaeessaaeseaeessaaeeeeeesaeenaees 485 QoS DSCP Mapen neinna ceive ts ts 486 QOS DSCP Translat nenna aio iia 486 QoS DSEP AT EE EEA A E A ld 487 QoS DSGP Classification MOd6 2 2 2 20 a A ta 487 QoS DSCP EgressReMapiiiii ei iii a i ai a idi e aiea 488 QoS SO Unicas e a a a a en ce da chet ee ey eee eal 488 QOS StormM ltica Stan eaea e eel a aes 489 QOS OCL AGG EENE EAE SE EAE A Ne BoA A E ee EE E a 489 QoS OCL Delete niie een ieee nie ene Abdi die eee 490 QoS OCL LOOKUP tai AN le Seat cde hire bain teat 491 QOS OCI StAtUs iia atada dsd 491 QOS QC REE a A dde wal a 492 6 18 Mirr
136. QUL LOOKUP cotorra iaa 508 Voice VEAN POE ModE uc at e aaas 509 Voice VLAN Sec ty ei 509 6 24 PMC CoA d es 511 IPMG Configuration xi n e a a EE a aa E EE A teed a aa N AA T e Eaa EEE Eaa 511 PME Modesto ai ty teste tnen tliat tibet oo llo ae ado dad 511 IPM GF IG OCI PE EEA TEE Ste e E EAN TOT e o o 512 IPMC Leave Pr aie ania enn ne elie eee eee ia endeared 512 IPMG Proxy oain cee ia 513 IPM State icone eet occ ees a a ate area cl 513 IPM G Querer boots siz A ia 514 IPMC FEasileave dai 515 PME Throttling s 2 cat to e E E a A e o 515 E A Fe dS ln ch ek DRE Ba a an a eon wi Cae RE ote dy 516 IPM GROWLER as ee E ae E ee ta a2 EN NEN at ee aN a oso ee saa rhe 516 IPMCG Status 0 di 517 PMC Group acia A A ai io 517 IPMCO VersiONuiiicisvisrn iaa a to a treat ocre 518 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series PMO S SM A A e a a a lesitdectvevedoleteetetests aces 518 IPMG Parameter n AANA E A ESEE EAEN S E SE OEE SE EAA ias 519 MANEA E EEA E E E EAE EEE EA A EEA dai E AEE A EE AET E AE 519 IPMC Parameter QRI c ccccccccccccssesseeecececeeseeeeceeeeeaueasececeenseaueeeceeeeeueeaseeeceeeseaueaseeeeeeeseaueaseeeeseeeeaaenseeeeseeeseeaeans 520 IPMG Parameter LLQ nna sas dad ciootes 520 IPMC Parameter UR A r a a ei 521 6 25 VLAN Control List COMMA d y a aida 522 VCL MAC based VLAN Configuration cc eecceeeeneeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeenaeeeeeeaaeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeesenaeeeeeeeaeeesneeeeneaas 522 VCL MAC based VLAN Add on
137. SSNS SS SSNS _ Figure 4 9 18 Voice VLAN Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields 198 Object User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Description e Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Age Time Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will based hardware age time The actual age time will be situated in the age_time 2 age_time interval Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this class Port Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible port modes are Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the
138. Security Switch SNMP User Changekey Description Change SNMPv3 user password Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Changekey lt engineid gt lt user_name gt lt auth_password gt lt priv_password gt 387 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all fFH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Delete SNMPv3 user entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp user changekey 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3 87654321 12345678 Security Switch SNMP User Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 user entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 user entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp user lookup Auth Priv Remote admin_snmpv3 Auth Priv MD5 DES Number of entries 1 Security Switch SNMP Group Add Description 388 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Add or modify SNMPv3
139. Series lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs name VLAN name string lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet combined Shows All the Combined VLAN database static Shows the VLAN entries configured by the administrator nas Shows the VLANs configured by NAS mvr Shows the VLANs configured by MVR voice_vlan Shows the VLANs configured by Voice VLAN all Shows all VLANs configuration default combined VLAN Users configuration Example Show VLAN status WGSD 10020HP gt vlan lookup VID VLAN Name default VLAN Name Add Description Add VLAN Name to a VLAN ID Mapping Syntax VLAN Name Add lt name gt lt vid gt Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Add VLAN name for VLAN 1 WGSD 10020HP gt vlan name add test 1 357 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series VLAN Name Delete Description Delete VLAN Name to VLAN ID Mapping Syntax VLAN Name Delete lt name gt Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet Example Delete VLAN name WGSD 10020HP gt vlan name delete test VLA
140. Series Example Set edge port BPDU filtering WGSD 10020HP gt stp bpdufilter enable STP BPDU Guard Description Set or show edge port BPDU Guard Syntax STP bpduGuard enable disable Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Guard for Edge ports Default Setting Disable Example Set edge port BPDU guard WGSD 10020HP gt stp bpduguard enable STP Recovery Description Set or show edge port error recovery timeout Syntax STP recovery lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt Time before error disabled ports are reenabled 30 86400 seconds 0 disables default Show recovery timeout Default Setting Disable 433 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Set STP recovery value in 30 sec WGSD 10020HP gt stp recovery 30 STP Status Description Show STP Bridge status Syntax STP Status lt msti gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting Disable Example Show STP Bridge status WGSD 10020HP gt stp status CIST Bridge STP Status 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 Root PathCost 0 Regional Root 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 20 Steady Pri PathCost Edge P2P Uptime DesignatedPort Forwarding 128 20000 Yes Yes 0d 00 10 32 434 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series STP MSTI Priority
141. This button is not available for new configurations Add new user Once the new user is added the new user entry shown in the Users Configuration page Users Configuration Username Privilige Level admin 15 quest 5 Test 1 Add new user Figure 4 2 6 User Configuration page screenshot 53 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series After change the default password if you forget the password Please press the Reset button in the front panel of the Managed Switch over 10 seconds and then release the current setting includes VLAN will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode 54 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 2 5 Privilege Levels This page provides an overview of the privilege levels After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 7 appears Privilege Level Configuration Privilege Levels Group Name Configuration Configuration Execute Status Statistics Status Statistics Read Us a Read a o Aggregation S 38 gi Diagnostics EJ IP Ss lt lt LLDP LLDP_MED MAC_Table MVR Maintenance S lt SSS SNS 4 es lt Mirroring Multicast PoE Port_Security Parts Private_VLANs Protocol_based_YLAN QoS SNMP Security Ss NES S lt ES ENERO lt S lt Ss lt lt Spanning_
142. Tree o System UPnP VLANs Voice_VLAN o lt lt S lt S lt Figure 4 2 7 Privilege Levels Configuration page screenshot 55 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriP HY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance Debug Only present in CLI e Privilege Level Every privilege level group has an authorization level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made local
143. User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Static Table This page provides Static ARP Inspection Table The Static ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 12 13 appears Static ARP Inspection Table Figure 4 12 13 Static ARP Inspection Table screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets Buttons Ada new entry Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 275 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 13 Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame
144. VLAN configuration User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 360 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series PVLAN Add Description Add or modify Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Add lt pvlan_id gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Add port1 to port4 in PVLAN10 WGSD 10020HP gt pvlan add 10 1 4 PVLAN Delete Description Delete Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Delete lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range Example Delete PVLAN10 WGSD 10020HP gt pvlan delete 10 PVLAN Lookup Description Lookup Private VLAN entry Syntax 361 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series PVLAN Lookup lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID default Show all PVLANs The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range Example Lookup PVLAN WGSD 10020HP gt pvlan lookup PVLANID Ports PVLAN Isolate Description Set or show the port isolation mode Syntax PVLAN Isolate lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port isolation disable Disable port isolatio
145. VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 4 6 3 VLAN Basic Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the Managed Switch The VLAN Basic Information screen in Figure 4 6 1 appears VLAN Basic Information LAN Basic Information Mode IEEE 802 10 Maximum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Current Number of VLANs 1 VLAN Learning PL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Figure 4 6 1 VLAN Basic Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Display the current VLAN mode used by this Managed Switch a Port Based E IEEE 802 1Q VLAN e Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this Managed Switch e Maximum Number of Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this Managed Switch Supported VLANs 111 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Current number of Display the current number of VLANs VLANs e VLAN Learning Display the VLAN learning mode The Managed Switch supports IVL IVL Independent vlan learning e Configurable PVID Indicates whether or not configurable
146. X and MAC based authentication system and port settings The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Configuration Security gt AAA page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below MAC based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X supplicant software installed on his system The switch uses the user s MAC address to authenticate against the backend server Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Network Access Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 4 appears 221 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Network Access Server Configuration System Configuration Disabled v Reauthentication Enabled Reauthentication Period seconds EAPOL Timeout seconds Aging Period seconds Hold Time seconds RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN ID Max Reaut
147. _video Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type video_signaling Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media tagged The device is using tagged frames unragged The device is using untagged frames lt vlan_id gt VLAN id lt I2_priority gt This field may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 lt dscp gt This field shall contain the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 5 This 6 bit field may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of O represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 LLDPMED Port Policy Description Set or show LLDP MED port polcies Syntax LLDPMED port policies lt port_list gt lt policy_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete 460 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series LLDPMED Coordinates Description Set or show LLDP MED Location Syntax LLDPMED Coordinates latitude longitudelal
148. a iea aE Taa 387 Security Switch SNMP User Changekey cocooocccccoccccconoccccnononcnnnonc cocoa cnn crono cnn ran n rra 387 Security Switch SNMP User LOOKUP iria ii cana 388 Security Switch SNMP Group Add eeeeeeeeeeee cence eeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeesaeeeseeaeeeseeeeeeesneeeesenaeeeeeenaees 388 Security Switch SNMP Group Delete 4 0c a A A E A aa 389 Security Switch SNMP Group LO0kUP ooooocccococccononcccnononcncnono nono nono nc nono tutkun At n nn rn n rra 389 Security Switch SNMP View Add coimas ce e 390 Security Switch SNMP View Delete coito idea inde 391 Security Switch SNMP View LOOKUP coooooocccococccononcncnononcncnono nono non ncnn non n nr narrar nn rre rra rre 391 Security Switch SNMP Access Add coccoocococcconoccnononononononcnonono cnn nnon cnn nano nr rra rre rre 392 Security Switch SNMP Access Delete ainiin i a e a a ia d deteeensecbiereedeluesdveenens 392 Security Switch SNMP Access LOOKUDP ccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeceeeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeceeeeeeesaaeeeeeeaaeeeseneeeeesneeeeeenaeeeeeenaees 393 Security Network Psec With o bald 393 Security Network Psec Portes cuco dobra 394 Security Network Limit Configuration ooooccionnncnnnccccnnnoncncnonannno nono cc nn non nn nro nn narran rr rre rr 395 security Network Limit Modei icono adie paeednabeuestedeqeeadnere 396 11 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network LiMItAJDINO oiiiiiaii ae 396 Security Network Limi
149. aaeeeseeeeeeesneeeesenaeeseeenaees 164 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 8 9 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration oooooccononcconoccccnononnnonononcnnnonn nn nono untk nano rn r arre 166 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Port Group Filterig ooooononnnnncnnnnncicnnnnoccnnnocccnnnnonnn cnn untk unuttu cnn nn rra rn 167 4 8 11 MLD Snooping Status cuicos ia id 168 4 8 12 MLD Group Information oooooccccccnononocococcncnononononcnn ce ee eee ceaeaeceeeeeeecaaaaecaeeeeeesaaeaeceeeeesecaaaeeeeeeeseseeaeeeeeeeseeeeneaeens 170 ZA A one sh i oe ee eee 170 AB Aa IMVR ise el nade th eee eA Se a eh aaa SL at saa Se A ye ek ee Se 171 48 15 MVR StAtUs d niiina tidad dada iteelg 173 4821 6 MVR Groups Io Mal mitico tit 174 4 9 Quality Of Service A A add 175 4 9 1 Understand QOS ii A da 175 4 9 2 Port Policia 176 4 9 3 Port ClassifIC MON iii aaa aabt 177 4 9 3 1 QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification ooooonnnnccnnnnnicnnnncccnnnonnnnnonccnnnnonnncnnnn nor nnrn cnn nan rn rnnnn rra 178 4 9 4 Port Schein ein elie Nae annie an ee awe 179 4 9 5 Port Sapling ici AO iia 180 4 9 5 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers o0occcccinocccnnoccccnononcnononononnnononcnano cnn rro n nn nn nn rn rr naar narrar rra 180 4 9 0 Port Tag ReMarkiNdi ri ii ia 182 4 9 6 1 QoS Egress Port Tag RemarkinQ ooococcccnnnocccnnococnnononcncnanonnnnonon cnn nan nn nc naar nn rn nn iiidid 183 A O O A A ee eh 183 4 9 3 DSCP Based QoS iras se e aa eh e dera e celo ode serena eel ado
150. able Enable SNMP trap authentication failure disable Disable SNMP trap authentication failure default Show SNMP trap authentication failure mode 380 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap authentication failure WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap authentication failure disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up Description Set or show the port link up and link down trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap link up and link down disable Disable SNMP trap link up and link down default Show SNMP trap link up and link down mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap link up WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap link up disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap inform 381 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series disable Disable SNMP trap inform default Show SNMP inform mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap inform mode WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap inform mode disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform timeout usecs Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout lt timeout gt
151. abled Disabled Disabled Disabled 449 LACP Statistics Description Show LACP Statistics Syntax LACP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LACP statistics Example Show LACP statistics of port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt lacp statistics 1 4 Port RxFrames TxFrames Rx Unknown Rx Illegal User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 450 6 11 LLDP Command LLDP Configuration Description Show LLDP configuration Syntax LLDP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LLDP configuration of port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt IIdp configuration 1 4 LLDP Configuration Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled LLDP Mode Description Set or show LLDP mode Syntax LLDP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx 451 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LLDP reception and transmission disable Disable LLDP rx Enable LLDP reception only tx Enable LLDP transmission only default Show LLDP mode Def
152. abled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled MVR Group Description Show the MVR group Syntax 500 MVR Group MVR Status Description Show the MVR status Syntax MVR Status MVR Mode Description Set or show the MVR mode Syntax MVR Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable MVR mode disable Disable MVR mode default Show MVR mode Default Setting disable Example Enable MVR mode User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt mvr mode enable MVR Port Mode Description Set or show the MVR port mode Syntax MVR Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable 501 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MVR mode disable Disable MVR mode default Show MVR mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the MVR port mode for port 1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt mvr port mode 1 4 enable MVR Multicast VLAN Description Set or show MVR multicast VLAN ID Syntax MVR Multicast VLAN lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show current MVR multicast VLAN ID Default Setting 100 Example Set VLAN 1000 for MVR multicast VLAN ID WGSD 10020HP gt mvr multi
153. abled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The Port Security Status screen in Figure 4 12 6 appears Port Security Switch Status User Module Legend User Module Name Abbr Limit Control 802 1X DHCP Snooping Voice VLAN Port Status MAC Count Port Users State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto refresh J Figure 4 12 6 Port Security Status screen page screenshot 1 2 3 4 5 6 E 8 3 10 The page includes the following fields User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services 266 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Object Description e User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services e Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table Port Status The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e Users Each of the user modules h
154. ables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port A MLD filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled MLD join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the MLD join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the MLD join report is dropped MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new MLD join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 13 appears 167 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Figure 4 8 13 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Group Buttons The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered Add new
155. act gt System contact string 1 255 Use clear or to clear the string In CLI No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact clear Clear system contact 324 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default Setting empty Example To set device contact WGSD 10020HP gt System contact WGSD 10020HP Test System Log Server Address Description Show or set the system log server address Syntax System Log Server Address lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Default Setting empty Example To set log server address WGSD 10020HP gt log server address 192 168 0 21 System Location Description Set or show the system location Syntax System Location lt location gt clear Parameters lt location gt System location string 1 255 Use clear or to clear the string In CLI no blank or space characters are permitted as part of a location 325 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series clear Clear system location Default Setting empty Example To set device location WGSD 10020HP gt System location 9F LAB System Log Level Description Show or set the system log level It uses to determine what kind of message will send to syslog server Syntax System Log Level info warninglerror Parameters info Send informations warnings and errors warning Send warnings a
156. after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Original Ethernet New Tagged Packet Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type Data Old CRC Dest Addr Src Addr E type Tag Length E type Data New CRC Priority CFI VLAN ID 109 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series M Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID withi
157. age immediately radiusAccClientExtRo undTripTime 250 Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals crear J Clears the counters for the selected server The Pending Requests counter will not be cleared by this operation User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 11 9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Managed switch In this case field in the de
158. ailure message This indicates that the supplicant client has not authenticated to the backend server 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant s first response packet to the backend server Indicates the switch attempted communication with the backend server Possible retransmissions are not counted MAC based Counts all the backend server 236 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port left most table or client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted e Last Supplicant Client Info Selected Counters Object Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Name IEEE Name Description MAC dot1xAuthLastEapolF The MAC address of the last supplicant client Address rameSource VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the last supplicant client was received Version dot1xAuthLastEapolF 802 1X based rameVersion The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable Identity 802 1X based The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable Descr
159. al Queries sent 159 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 255 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds e QRI Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds e LLQI LMAI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second e URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is O to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields k lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID laa gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 4 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filterin
160. al effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of E hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of L 4 WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately ai Revision PLANET 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Ethernet SwitchUser s Manual FOR MODELS WGSD 10020 Series REVISION 1 1 September 2012 Part No EM WGSD 10020 Series 2080 A35110 001 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series TABLE OF CONETNTS 1 INTRODUTION oi 20 11 Packe Contes a a 20 1 2 Product Descr pi ON a e eea a a cece Ear tule a a Ear e aae e aa aaan paanan ani 20 1 3 How to Use This Manual cocina tee lude etelcuecbessatedstueducsstalbcwasvianuedivedeeies 22 1 4 Product P atures E P E E E E A 23 1 5 Prod ct Specification iia 26 2 NSTALLATI O N oasis aa aaa aar aaa cis esau ctu ncaa ec anaes a E aa E EE E aAA aaaea adaa iaaii 29 2 1 Hardware DescriptioM sa rr nanena eaae nada 29 21 1 Switch Front Pane lesene taa aaea cote eh aar aaa bps aia reece e aaae eaae aeaa a Aea ea aae eaa sa stacks anait 29 22 LED INGICAUOMS a r a at he oad aed eet here tees a a ste eae eee 30 2 1 3 Switch Rear Panel cono Ag 32 2 2 Install the Witch nada 33 22 1 Desktop Installation id 33 22 2 RACK MOUNUING A A a e el e ME MA 34 2 2 3 Installing the SFP tra
161. al of WGSD 10020 Series default Show current per port RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness enable Enable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable RADIUS assigned VLAN WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas radius_vian enable Security Network NAS EapolTimeout Description Set or show the time between EAPOL retransmissions Syntax Security Network NAS EapolTimeout lt eapol_timeout gt Parameters lt eapol_timeout gt Time between EAPOL retransmissions 1 65535 seconds default Show current EAPOL retransmission timeout Default Setting 30 Example Set the time between EAPOL retransmissions for 100sec WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas eapoltimeout 100 Security Network NAS Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses Syntax 403 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network NAS Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time between checks for activitiy on a MAC address that succeeded autentication default Show current age time Default Setting 300 Example Set NAS age time in 1000sec WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas agetime 1000 Security Network NAS Holdtime Description Time i
162. al of WGSD 10020 Series 6 18 Mirror Command Mirror Configuration Description Show mirror configuration Syntax Mirror Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show mirror configuration WGSD 10020HP gt mirror configuration Mirror Port Description Set or show the mirror port Syntax Mirror Port lt port gt disable Parameters lt port gt disable Mirror port or disable default Show port Default Setting disable Example Set port 2 for the mirror port WGSD 10020HP gt mirror port 2 493 Mirror Mode Description Set or show the mirror mode Syntax Mirror Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Rx and Tx mirroring disable Disable Mirroring rx Enable Rx mirroring tx Enable Tx mirroring default Show mirror mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the mirror mode for port 1 4 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt mirror mode 1 4 enable 494 6 19 Configuration Command Configuration Save Description Save configuration to TFTP server Syntax Config Save lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name Configuration Load Description
163. ameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 256 default Next available ID lt ace_id_next gt Next ACE ID 1 256 default Add ACE last switch Switch ACE keyword port Port ACE keyword lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports policy Policy ACE keyword 410 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt policy gt Policy number 1 8 lt tagged gt Tagged of frames any enable disable lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any lt tag_prio gt VLAN tag priority 0 7 or any lt dmac_type gt DMAC type any unicast multicast broadcast etype Ethernet Type keyword lt etype gt Ethernet Type 0x600 OxFFFF or any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 0x806 ARP and 0x86DD IPv6 lt smac gt Source MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX or any lt dmac gt Destination MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX or any arp ARP keyword lt sip gt Source IP address a b c d n or any lt dip gt Destination IP address a b c d n or any lt arp_opcode gt ARP operation code anylarp rarp other lt arp_flags gt ARP flags request smac tmac len ip ether 0 1 any ip IP keyword lt protocol gt IP protocol number 0 255 or any lt ip_flags gt IP flags ttlloptions fragment 0 1 any icmp ICMP keyword lt icmp_type gt ICMP type number 0 255 or any lt icmp_code gt ICMP code number 0 255 or any udp UDP keyword lt sport gt Source UDP TCP port range 0
164. ample fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of 80 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e Trap Authentication Failure Indicates the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap authentication failure Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication failure e Trap Link up and Link down Indicates the SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation e Trap Inform Mode Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation e Trap Inform Timeout seconds Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 e Trap Inform Retry Times Buttons Save Click to save changes Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is O to 255 Rese Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 3 SNMP System Information The switch system information is provided here The SNMP System Inf
165. and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN CLI Web SNMP This are reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only ona single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Buttons Static Y Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 8 Private VLAN The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forwar
166. anning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 10 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 5 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow for example a TCP connection are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible The aggregation code is based on the following information e Source MAC e Destination MAC e Source and destination IPv4 address e Source and destination TCP UDP ports for IPv4 packets Normally all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports Each link aggregation may consist of up to 10 member ports Any quantity of link aggregation s may be c
167. applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Buttons Combined de l Select the ACL status from this drop down list Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a newACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 2 appears 202 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter Figure 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will ma
168. arios The IEEE 802 3af standard requires that devices powered over Ethernet be disconnected safely i e power needs be shut down within a short period of time following disconnection of a PD from an active port When a PD is disconnected there is a danger that it will be replaced by a non PoE ready device while power is still on Imagine disconnecting a powered IP phone utilizing 48 VDC then inadvertently plugging the powered Ethernet cable into a non PoE notebook computer What s sure to follow is not a pretty picture The standard defines two means of disconnection DC Disconnect and AC Disconnect both of which provide the same functionality the PSE shutdowns power to a disconnected port within 300 to 400ms The upper boundary is a physical human limit for disconnecting one PD and reconnecting another 532 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series DC Disconnect DC Disconnect detection involves measurement of current Naturally a disconnected PD stops consuming current which can be inspected by the PSE The PSE must therefore disconnect power within 300 to 400 ms from the current flow stop The lower time boundary is important to prevent shutdown due to random fluctuations AC Disconnect This method is based on the fact that when a valid PD is connected to a port the AC impedance measured on its terminals is significantly lower than in the case of an open port disconnected PD AC Disconnect detection involves the induction of l
169. as a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security e State Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page e MAC Count Current The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses Limit forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Buttons Refresh Click to refresh
170. ask gt Parameters lt community gt Community string lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask Example Add SNMPv3 community entry Security Switch SNMP Community Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 385 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Delete SNMPv3 community entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp community delete 3 Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 community entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp community lookup Idx Community Source IP Source Mask 192 168 0 20 255 255 255 0 2 private 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Number of entries 2 Security Switch SNMP User Add Description Add SNMPv3 user entry The entry index key are lt engineid gt and lt user_name gt and it doesn t allow modify Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Add lt engineid gt lt user_name gt MD5 SHA lt auth_password gt DES lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all fFH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt A str
171. ass3 level As IEEE 802 3at mode system is going to reserve 30 8Watts for PD that support Class4 level From class1 to 309 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series class3 level on the 802 3at mode will be reserved the same PoE power with 802 3af mode e Priority The Priority represents PoE ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in the case when total power consumption has been over total power budget In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off and offer power for the port of higher priority e Maximum Power The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts that can be delived to a remote device Per port maximum value must less than 30 8 watts total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value Once power overload detected the port will auto shut down and keep on detection mode until PD s power consumption lower than the power limit value Buttons Save e Power Allocation Click to save changes It can limit the port PoE supply watts Per port maximum value must less than 30 8 watts total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value Once power overload detected the port will auto shut down and keep on detection mode until PD s power consumption lower than the power limit value Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert t
172. assification Class lt port_list gt lt class gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt QoS class 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set default QoS class in 1 for port 1 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt q0s Port Classification Class 1 1 473 QoS Port Classification DPL Description Set or show the default Drop Precedence Level Syntax QoS Port Classification DPL lt port_list gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 1 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default Drop Precedence Level in 1 for port1 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port Classification dpl 1 1 QoS Port Classification PCP Description Set or show the default PCP for an untagged frame Syntax QoS Port Classification PCP lt port_list gt lt pcp gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default PCP for an untagged frame in 1 for port1 WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port Classification pcp 1 1 474 QoS Port Classification DEI Description Set or show the default DEI for an untagged frame Syntax QoS Port Classification DEI lt port_list gt lt dei gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All po
173. ate The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e LastID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here 232 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 11 5 Network Access Statistics This page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected backend server RADIUS Auth
174. ate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging 110 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Hi VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame M Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Hi Untagged VLANs Untagged or static
175. ater than zero must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Option Specify the options flag setting for this ACE 209 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series No IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e SIP Filter Specify the source IP filter for this ACE Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear e SIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation e SIP Mask When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation e DIP Filter Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address
176. ation on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance 546 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally unique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 10 frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE gt system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD
177. ation option policy When enable DHCP relay Policy information mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already 60 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP relay information operation mode enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it Keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it Drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 9 DHCP Relay Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP relay The DHCP Relay Statistics screen in Figure 4 2 12 appears DHCP Relay Statistics Server Statistics Transmit to Transmit Receive from Receive Missing Agent Receive Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad Server Error Server Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit ID Remote ID 0 0 0 0 Client Statistics Transmit to Client Transmit Error Receive from Client Receive Agent Option Replace Agent Option Keep Agent Option Drop Agent Option 0 0 0 D D 0 D Auto Refresh Refresh Clear Figure 4 2 12 DHCP Relay Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Server Statist
178. ault Setting disable Example Enable port1 LLDP function WGSD 10020HP gt IIdp mode 1 enable LLDP Optional TLV Description Show or Set LLDP Optional TLVs Syntax LLDP Optional_TLV lt port_list gt port_descr sys_name sys_descr sys_capa mgmt_addr enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports port_descr Description of the port sysm_name System name sys_descr Description of the system sys_capa System capabilities mgmt_addr Master s IP address default Show optional TLV s configuration enable Enables TLV disable Disable TLV default Show optional TLV s configuration Default Setting Description of the port Enable System name Enable Description of the system Enable 452 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series System capabilities Enable Master s IP address Enable Example Disable description of the port for port1 WGSD 10020HP gt lldp optional_tlv 1 port_descr disable LLDP Interval Description Set or show LLDP Tx interval Syntax LLDP Interval lt interval gt Parameters lt interval gt LLDP transmission interval 5 32768 Default Setting 30 Example Set transmission interval in 10 WGSD 10020HP gt Ildp interval 10 LLDP Hold Description Set or show LLDP Tx hold value Syntax LLDP Hold lt hold gt Parameters lt hold gt LLDP hold value 2 10 Default Setting 3 453 U
179. ause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 231 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 11 4 Network Access Overview This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for the selected switch The Network Access Overview screen in Figure 4 11 5 appears Network Access Server Switch Status Admin State Port State Last ID QoS Class Port LAN ID Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized gt 3 4 5 6 Zz 8 3 10 Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Auto refresh CI Figure 4 11 5 Network Access Server Switch Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port St
180. authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 11 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server Authentication Client ki pee pen 802 1X Switch v D 3 EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request or EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge Se EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request oO EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept Se Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 11 2 EAP message exchange 219 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series E Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does n
181. ay potentially SET new values The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Add SNMPv3 access entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp access add group_snmpv3 usm authpriv snmpv3_view snmpv3_view Security Switch SNMP Access Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 access entry 392 Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 access entry User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp access delete 3 Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 access entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp access lookup Model Level default_ro_group any NodAuth NoPriv 2 default_rw_group any NodAuth NoPriv Number of entries 2 Security Network Psec Switch Description Show Port Security status Syntax 393 Security Network Psec Switch lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show port security status WGSD 10020HP gt security network psec switch Users L Limit Control 8 802 1X D DHCP Snooping V Voice VLAN Port Users State MAC Cnt
182. ayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 Buttons Refresh Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny Click to refresh the page immediately Lk lt Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 8 MLD Snooping Configuration This page provides MLD Snooping related configuration The MLD Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 11 appears 164 The page includes the following fields Object Router Port Throttling 1 O unlimited Y User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series MLD Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled O Unregistered IPMC 6 Flooding Enabled Leave Proxy Enabled O Proxy Enabled Port Related Configuration lt lt OOOOOOO0000 2 3 4 5 6 l 8 9 0 OOOOO0O0000 K BB ad _ Figure 4 8 11 MLD Snooping Configuration page screenshot Description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping e Unregistered IPMC Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Please note that disabling unregister
183. b 3Com phones 00 01 e3 Siemens AG phones Figure 4 9 19 Voice VLAN OUI Table page screenshot O O O O O O O O The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Telephony OUI An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description The description of OUI address Normaly it descript which vendor telephony device The allowed string length is 0 to 32 Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new access management entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 200 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 10 Access Control Lists ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a ho
184. binds a oa 185 a eRe DNT A ETa ELO A EEE EE E aaa 187 4 9 10 DSCP Classifications in edie i 190 4 9 11 008 Control Listin A ig eed a akties Rae SAR Eee 191 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration oooccccnnnnccnnnnoccnnnoncncnanonnon conc nn cnn nn nc canon nn rro EAEE rana 192 4 912 QOS AUS ii AAA a depeebedls te eit abd pelephaaitl 195 4 9 13 Storm Control Configuration risien ai i sti geten edt deesebiedeeaseanedee a aii 196 49 14 QOS Statistics ii ito 197 49 15 Voice VEAN Configuration siii id 198 4 9 16 Voice VLAN OUI Table A E E E E A E E 200 4 10 Access Control Lists cion cito scdavase airis adan aliado sanidad e aiae 201 4 10 1 Access Gontrol List Status cia tdt 201 4 10 2 Access Control List ConfiguratiON ococoonioniinnici ii 202 410 3 ACE Configuration ii oi oca 204 4 1 0 4 ACL Ports Configura A A 213 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ooononcccnnnninnnoccccnnnonnnonononnnnnorncnnn non n rr nono rra 214 4 11 Authenticate a a a a r in dada 216 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication 0 0 0 0 eee eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeseeeeeeesnaeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeees 217 4 11 2 Authentication Configuratio Nani e a a e a a e aa aa a E daaa ae 220 4 11 3 Network Access Server ConfiguratiON ooooonccnnnncccnnnoccccnononnnnnnnncnnnn cnn crono n nn rn nn rre 221 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 11 4 Network Access OvervieW iii ii 232 4 11 5 Network Access Statistics airas noo 233 4 11 6 A
185. bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 57 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 2 7 UPnP Configure UPnP on this page UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components The UPnP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 9 appears UPnP Configuration Advertising Duration Figure 4 2 9 UPnP Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled e TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 e Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisem
186. bly less time and effort than before Flexibility and Extension Solution The two mini GBIC slots built in the WGSD 10020 support Dual Speed 100Base FX and 1000Base SX LX SFP Small Form factor Pluggable fiber optic modules that means the administrator now can flexibly choose the suitable SFP transceiver according to not only the transmission distance but also the transmission speed required The distance can be extended from 550 meters Multi Mode fiber up to above 10 50 70 120 kilometers Single Mode fiber or WDM fiber They are well suited for applications within the enterprise data centers and distributions Centralized Power Management for Gigabit Ethernet PoE Networking WGSD 10020HP Only To fulfill the needs of higher power required PoE network applications with Gigabit speed transmission PLANET introduces new member WGSDH 10020HP the 8 Port Gigabit High Power over Ethernet Managed Switch which features high performance Gigabit IEEE 802 3af PoE Up to 15 4W and IEEE 802 3at High Power PoE Up to 30 8W on all ports By supporting reliable stacking technology and advanced networking features which optimize the installation and power management of network devices such as wireless access points AP Voice over IP VoIP phones and security video cameras The PoE capabilities also help to reduce deployment costs for network devices like the wireless AP as a result of freeing from restrictions of power outlet locations Power and data
187. by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page Note that non committed changes will be lost Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 2 Access Management Configure access management table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch The Access Management Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 2 appears 262 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Access Management Configuration COIE Delete Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH The page includes the following fields Figure 4 12 2 Access Management Configuration Overview page screenshot Object Description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry e End IP address Indicates the end IP address for
188. by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VolP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags 553 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also kn
189. cast vlan 1000 MVR Port Type Description Set or show MVR port type 502 Syntax MVR Port Type lt port_list gt source receiver Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports source Enable source mode receiver Disable receiver mode default Show MVR port type Default Setting receive Example Set source type for MVR port type of port 1 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt mvr port type 1 source MVR Immediate Leave Description Set or show MVR port state about immediate leave Syntax MVR Immediate Leave lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Immediate leave mode disable Disable Immediate leave mode default Show MVR Immediate leave mode Default Setting disable Example Enable MVR port state about immediate leave for port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt mvr immediate leave 1 enable 6 23 Voice VLAN Command Voice VLAN Configuration Description Show Voice VLAN configuration Syntax Voice VLAN Configuration Example Show Voice VLAN configuration WGSD 10020HP gt voice vian configuration V oice VLAN Configuration Disabled Voice VLAN VLAN ID 1000 Voice VLAN Age Time seconds 86400 Voice VLAN Traffic Class AT Voice VLAN OUI Table PLANET phones Cisco phones H3C phones Philips and NEC AG phones Pingtel phones
190. cation server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial ln User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the 21
191. cccinnnnnnnoccccnononcncnnnonnnn nono tankit untk knnet nn ran cnn rre 406 Security Network NAS Statistics tsei dete dida its ds de lied ie 407 Security Network ACL Configuration oooooocccnoninnnoccccnononcnnnonancnn nono tnnt nn n nn nro rra rn 408 Security Network ACL Acticin ah ae ee ee viene ais 408 Security Network ACL Policy einasi inn icon 409 Security Network ACL Rate eciiise cssssgcsccsestencescctenansattphestectes ias aida dra 409 Security Network AG Addon A ir aee a Tehea aasre iaiia 410 Security Network ACL Delete 0coooiiii ae 411 Security Network AGL LookUp siaine innnan e a once 412 Sec rit Network ACE Clear sreinge ai is 412 Security Network ACL Status ariete erario aaa pE eeeeneeeeesaaeeeceeeeeeesaeeeeeesaaeeeseeeaeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeneaeeeseeeeeeesnteeeeeaaes 413 Security Network DHCP Relay Configurati0N ooooocoonnnncnnnnoccnononcccnononnnnnnno cnn o nono nc nano nn rr nan rn rn 413 Security Network DHCP Relay Mode oooooccccococccccocccccononcncnono nono noc ncnn non n nc kide iieo rra rrnnn 414 Security Network DHCP Relay Server ocoiomicocicaciacin A A 414 Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode ooooccccinocccnnoccccnononcnonononcnn non nnnn non n rn nana nn rn nn cnn nr rra 415 Security Network DHCP Relay Information PoliCY oooocconnninnnnncccnnnoccconononnnnnonccnnn no nn nr nano cnn rn cnn rr rr 415 Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics ooononcccnnnnniccnnnnccnnnonccnnnnannnnnnn cnn rnnrn cnn nan
192. ccess Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 228 e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN
193. cepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions a Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements a Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups a Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree a Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used E The unique switch identifier E The path cost to the root associated with each switch port E The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information a The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch The path cost to the root from the transmitting port E The port identifier of the transmitting port 135 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the
194. ch greatly simplifies the tasks of upgrading the LAN for catering to increasing bandwidth demands Robust Layer 2 Features The WGSD 10020 series can be programmed for advanced switch management functions such as dynamic Port link aggregation Q in Q VLAN private VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree protocol Layer 2 to Layer 4 QoS bandwidth control and IGMP MLD Snooping The WGSD 10020 series provides 802 1Q Tagged VLAN and the VLAN groups allowed will be maximally up to 255 Via aggregation of supporting ports the WGSD 10020 series allows the operation of a high speed trunk combining multiple ports It enables maximum up to 5 groups of 10 ports for trunking and supports fail over as well Excellent Traffic Control The WGSD 10020 series is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services offered by telecoms The functionality includes QoS features such as wire speed Layer 4 traffic classifiers and bandwidth limiting that are particular useful for multi tenant unit multi business unit Telcom or Network Service Provide applications It also empowers the enterprises to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantees the best performance in VoIP and Video conferencing transmission Efficient Management For efficient management the WGSD 10020 series Managed Ethernet Switch is equipped with console WEB and SNMP management interfaces With the built in Web based management interface the PLANET WGSD 10020
195. ckoff algorithm after 16 collisions default Show mode Default Setting Discard 342 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example WGSD 10020HP gt port excessive 1 restart Port Statistics Description Show port statistics Syntax Port Statistics lt port_list gt lt command gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt command gt _ The command parameter takes the following values clear Clear port statistics packets Show packet statistics bytes Show byte statistics errors Show error statistics discards Show discard statistics filtered Show filtered statistics 0 7 Show priority statistics default Show all port statistics up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down default Show all ports Port VeriPHY Description Run cable diagnostics Syntax Port VeriPHY lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 343 Port SFP Description Show SFP port information Syntax Port SFP lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show SFP information for port21 24 WGSD 10020HP gt port sfp Port Type Wave Length nm Distance m 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1310 10000 10 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1310 10000 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 344 6 4 MAC Address Table Command Descriptio
196. clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States E Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below 217 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Authentication server Authentication server RADIUS Server TACACS Server Authenticator Internet PLANET 802 1X aware Switch Intra p de oad Supplicant C Client with 802 1X authentication Figure 4 11 1 Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authenti
197. comes in the Ethernet Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 7 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability How ever the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to signifi cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequentl
198. congestion QoS Terminology e Classifier classifies the traffic on the network Traffic classifications are determined by protocol application source destination and so on You can create and modify classifications The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level e DiffServ Code Point DSCP is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network e Service Level defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic You can create and modify service levels e Policy comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business That is traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type e QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules classifier plus service level combinations The QoS profile is assigned to a port s e Rules comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic Rules are associated with a QoS Profile see above To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified a
199. coooocccncocccccononcnonononcnononccnnn non nnnnnnn cnn rn nn nn nan rr rana 422 Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode ococcccconoccccnonoccnononononononcnn nono cnn rnnnn nn naar rr rr nan 422 Security Network ARP Inspection ENtlY ooocooocccnnoncccnnnoccncnononcnonono cocoa nn nn nono cnn rn n cnn nnn rra rana 423 Security Network ARP Inspection Status ooooooionnccnnnoccccnonocnnononnccnononnnn nono cnn nono nn nano nr rra 423 Security AAA Configuration serrian intiena aan aR nn nr norris 424 Security AAA TIMEOUT iioii ia a 425 Security AAA Dead 425 Security AAA RADIUS ui ias 426 Security AAA ACCT RADIUS iia tds iaa need ends 427 Security AAA TACACS Ein od dad aros ora 427 Security AAA StatistiCs coi aa 428 6 8 Spanning Tree Protocol Command comccccnnncnninnnnncanccrr cr 429 STP GoOnfiQuration ee 429 SEP VERSION E nish leeds E chee tans E A any Soar dte ee baked See E T 429 STR TX Hold concoct ets sienes tn as elo e ee celo de aes aan pal dde ce Dans Gai 430 AMM AS aan 430 STP MaxAge k nren pa a tada s 431 STP PwdDelay ici A Din eed a a nerd Saeed 431 STP CNAME suit idad el 432 STP BRDU Filter 00 ccot coco En oer cada de aaron decida oo do E a dl od e a dd ed 432 STP BPDU Guardia A ii 433 A ka a a a a Ea A A A EA EE E a N AA AE A E AAA AEn a TR EAA AE AAE EEE EN NAE 433 SUP StAtuS iei i aii 434 SP MST Eea AEAEE E E A A 435 STP MSTI Mai asa es 435 SEP MS IA A ed o o o o loa dete 436 STP Port Configuratio Nisee ae ap
200. cription Set or Show the SNMP trap destination address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string 379 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Set SNMP trap destination address for 192 168 0 20 WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap destination 192 168 0 20 Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination lt ipv6_addr gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Example Set SNMP trap IPv6 destination address for 2001 0001 WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap ipv6 destination 2001 0001 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure Description Set or show the SNMP authentication failure trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure enable disable Parameters en
201. ct the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media 36 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Converter Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed Co works with some fiber NICs or Media Converters set the Link mode to 1000 Force or 100 Force is needed Remove the transceiver module Make sure there is no network activity by consult or check with the network administrator Or through the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently Turn the handle of the MGB module to horizontal Pull out the module gently through the handle tr a y MGB SX LX 2 Figure 2 11 Pull out the SFP transceiver Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module Direct pull out the module with violent could damage the module and SFP module slot of the Managed Switch 37 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal comput
202. ction of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN tag unaware The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID 1 This section has the following items VLAN Basic Information VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Memberships VLAN Membership Status VLAN Port Status Private VLAN Port Isolation MAC based VLAN MAC based VLAN Status Protocol based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Membership Displaies VLAN information Enable VLAN group Configures the VLAN membership Display VLAN membership status Display VLAN port status Creates removes primary or co
203. d packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs 120 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The Private VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 6 appears Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members ee 7 peieeJeviano 12131110 0 9 pe 1 M MMMMMMM M M The page includes the following fields Object Figure 4 6 6 Private VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot Description e Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save e Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN e Port Members Buttons A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked _Add new Private VLAN Click to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 6 9 Port Isolation Overview When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be me
204. d you have changed via console to login the main screen of Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears Connect to 192 168 0 100 The server 192 168 0 100 at Web Management requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name i v Password Remember my password Figure 4 1 2 Login screen Default User name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 44 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020 4 WGSD 10020 Welcome to PLANET WGSD 10020 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 2 100 1000X SFP Management Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email Support planet com tw Copyright 2011 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 4 1 3 Default main page Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides 1 It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch The changed IP address take effect immediately after c
205. deo for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy e Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified ap
206. describe these methods For more information about using the console refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console Management 39 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series PC Workstation Managed Switch with Terminal emulation software _ BEY Serial Port 115200 8 n 1 gt A Y gt 3 RS 232 Serial Port Figure 3 1 Console management Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight DB9 RS 232 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are 115200 bps 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit COM Properties Port Settings Bits per second 4AE Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Figure 3 2 Terminal parameter settings You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to t
207. diately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 104 4 5 4 LACP Port Status User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4 5 6 appears LACP Status Partner Partner No owomaonyonk UN Auto refresh O Figure 4 5 6 LACP Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled e Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs e Partner System ID The partners System ID MAC address e Partner Port Buttons Refresh The partners port number connected to this port Click to refresh the page immediately 105 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 5 5 LACP Port Statistics This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports The LACP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 5 7 appears LACP Statistics Received Transm
208. ding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit e Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply to this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 15 The default value is Disabled e Port Copy Select which port frames are copied to The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled e Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored 213 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The default value is Disabled e Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled e Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE U te Ss o 5 D ave Click to save changes Click to clear the counters Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Click to refresh
209. ding to disabled E From disabled to blocking 136 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Blocking _ _ Learning Disable Forwarding Figure 4 7 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level 137 Parameter Description User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MA
210. ds Object Description e Time The time at which the LEDs intensity shall be set e Intensity The LEDs intensity 100 Full power 0 LED off e Maintenance Time When a network administrator does maintenance of the switch e g adding or moving users he might want to have full LED intensity during the maintenance period Therefore it is possible to specify that the LEDs shall use full intensity a specific period of time Maintenance Time is the number of seconds that the LEDs will have full intensity after either a port has changed link state or the LED pushbutton has been pushed Buttons Add Time J Click to add time Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 67 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 2 15 EEE Power Reduction This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current EEE port settings EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is very low traffic utilization or no traffic EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits
211. e Description Set or show the SNMP mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP disable Disable SNMP default Show SNMP mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP mode WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp mode disable Security Switch SNMP Version Description Set or show the SNMP protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP version Default Setting 2c Example Set SNMP in version 3 376 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp version 3 Security Switch SNMP Read Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP read access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Read Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP read community Default Setting public Example Set SNMP read community private WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp read community private Security Switch SNMP Write Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP write access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Write Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP write community Default Setting
212. e cece aa 381 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode uu eeeceeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeceeeeeeesaeeeseeaaeeeseeeaeeseneeeesenaeeesennaees 381 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform TiMeOUt ooooononcccnnnoccccnonoccnononononanonnnnnnnn cnn nono n cnn nan nr r rra rn rra 382 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry TiMES ooooonoccccnnnociconoccninononcnnnono cnn nnonn nn nono nn rr narran rre 382 Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID ooonooonncccc nnonccononancnononcnonononnnn nono cnn ronrn rn n nan r nr nnn rn rn 383 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine lD oooonnncccninonicononoccnnnoncnononancnnnnrn cn nono nn rn nono nc rr nn rn 383 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security NAME oooooiococccnnocccononoccnononononononnncnnnn cnn ono n cnn naar rr rr narrar rra 384 Security Switch SNMP Engine lD oooocononcccnnnoccnonononcnononcncnononcno utkuta nono tutkun At nn rra nn rre 384 Security Switch SNMP Community Add c ooocooocccccoccccnononcnonononano nono nc nono tunk nano rca n rre rn 385 Security Switch SNMP Community Delete ooooonnccccnnnocccnonaccnononcncnanonc nc nono cnn rnonn cnn nan r rr nnn rra 385 Security Switch SNMP Community LOOkKUP oooooccoccccnnnoccncnononanononononanonnncnono cnn ran n nn nano rr rra rra rn 386 Security Switch SNMP User Add c c ececccedscereetesecsecedecnenecurcnresedneesuscesensdetpenedereesegceedeengneengeradseseeseqereseeeeseduenseee 386 Security Switch SNMP User Delete saienisi i
213. e for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 194 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Action Configuration Class QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification DP Valid DP Level can be 0 3 default basic classification DSCP Valid dscp value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Click to save the configuration and move to main QCL page Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page without saving the configuration change 4 9 12 QoS Status This page shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch The QoS Control List Status screen in Figure 4 9 15 appears QoS Control List Status Combined 3 Action User QCE Frame Type Port over oces came we ort Top zo DSCP No entries Autoretesh C Figure 4 9 15 QoS Control List Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Indicates the QCL user e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Et
214. e Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 544 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series LLDP MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the admin
215. e RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port e Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port e Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Buttons 152 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh i l Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals clear Click to clear the information immediately 153 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 8 Multicast 4 8 1 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Pr
216. e SFP module Different vendors SFP modules might shows different speed information e Wave Length nm Display the wavelength of current SFP module the wavelength value is get from the SFP module Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes are the matched while the fiber connection is failed e Distance m Buttons Refresh Display the supports distance of current SFP module the distance value is get from the SFP module Click to refresh the page immediately 95 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 4 6 Port Mirror Configure port Mirroring on this page This function provide to monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Mirroring UP Link Source Port Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 4 6 Port Mirror application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as foll
217. e end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Mode Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port e Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The stackswitch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses e Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP
218. e instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt path_cost gt STP port path cost 1 200000000 or auto Default auto Example Set MSTI7 in port1 WGSD 10020HP gt stp msti port cost 7 1 MSTI Port Path Cost MST7 1 Auto STP MSTI Port Priority Description Set or show the STP port instance priority Syntax STP Msti Port Priority lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations 442 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt priority gt STP port priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default 128 443 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 9 Link Aggregation Command Aggregation Configuration Description Show link aggregation configuration Syntax Aggr Configuration Aggregation Add Description Add or modify link aggregation Syntax Aggr Add lt port_list gt lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID Example Add port 1 4 in Group1 WGSD 10020HP gt aggr add 1 4 1 Aggregation Delete Description Delete link aggregation Syntax Aggr Delete lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID Example Delete G
219. e switch The Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table screen in Figure 4 6 20 appears Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Port Members Ss Delete Group Name vian 10 a 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 9 30 No Groupentries No Group entries Figure 4 6 20 Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table page screenshot 133 The page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Description e Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this page e VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 Buttons Save e Port Members Click to save changes A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 134 User s Manual
220. e that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 87 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Add new access Click to add a new access entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 88 4 4 Port Management User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Sw
221. each isolate port But they all need to access with the same server AP Printer The screen in Figure 4 6 14 appears This section will show you how to configure the port for the server that could be accessed by each isolate port 128 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Promiscuous Public Servers Pi or iscuous isolate isolate VLAN 1 Private VLAN VLAN 2 Private VLAN Setup steps 1 Assign Port Mode Set Port 1 Port 4 in Isolate port Set Port5 and Port 6 in Promiscuous port The screen in Figure 4 6 15 appears Port Number ORARAA OODODO Figure 4 6 15 The configuration of Isolate and Promiscuous port 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 5 and Port 3 VLAN 2 Port 3 Port 6 The screen in Figure 4 6 16 appears Port Members rare embers 77 Delete vian w 1 2 4 5 6 7 e 9 x0 Mololalalola 2 DOMMEMODoDO Figure 4 6 16 Private VLAN port setting 129 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 6 11 MAC based VLAN The MAC based VLAN enties can be configured here This page allows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries The MAC based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 17 appears MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members an Delete mac adaress vran 10 s 2 3 4 5 6f7 efoli0 Currently no entries present Currently no entries present Figure 4 6 17 MAC based
222. ed See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each 538 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspect
223. ed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Description e Edge Port BPDU Filtering Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs e Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology e Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot 142 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Port Error Recovery The time that has to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be Timeout enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours The Gigabit Ethernet Switch implement the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol While select Compatibles mode the system use the RSTP 802 1w to compatible and co work with another STP 802 1d s BPDU control packets Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 3 Bridge Status This page provides a status overview for all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge
224. ed but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link 4 7 2 STP System Configuration This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch or switch Stack The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatiable Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree The STP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 7 appears STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version Bridge Priority Forward Delay Maximum Hop Count Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering O eee Port BPDU Guard O Port Error Port Error Recovery O Figure 4 7 7 STP Bridge Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields 141 Basic Settings Object User s Man
225. ed IPMCv 6 traffic flooding may lead to failure of Neighbor Discovery e Leave Proxy Enable Enable MLD Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side e Proxy Enable Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side e Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port e Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Throtting Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong 165 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 9 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Fig
226. ed application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately mm Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 14 5 Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears LLDP Neighbour Information Local Port Chassis ID Remote Port ID System Name Port Description System Capabilities Management Address No LLDP neighbour information found Auto refresh O Figure 4 14 4 LLDP Neighbor Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames 294 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit e System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 capabilities are Other Repeater Bridge WLA
227. ed station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently e BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not effect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well e Point2Point Buttons Save Click to save changes Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transitions to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 145 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 EE 802
228. eeeaseeeeeegseeeeesaseeneeenseenenenseenenes 527 7 4 SOSA l F OF PARANA aaa aara Aaa aa a Aaaa aaea da a a Aaaa ad aaea a aaa pa adana 527 TD AUtO NOG OULAtiOn e ae coke aeaa acia 528 8 POWER OVER ETHERNET OVERVIEW c cooccccccncccnooccononcconanocananonananonananonanarcnnanrcnanaronananna 529 LERNER ES E 529 Th POE ProviSiOn PrOCeSS siapin ae a id 531 Stages of powering up a POE link esscecessscceceenecceessceedecsneeresnaesedeceneensuesnentnesdecesnsececssasederengencnessgeedecanesereesnaaeeeess 531 LINE Detecta tadas 531 CIASSITICATION ii A rie 532 DUANE ees fx eh cast secs teed ve icu EE E NEE EEE ETE EE 532 O Seeuats Aencbade E E te apeate hate lec 532 18 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Power Disconnection Scenarios esseeeececececeesessececececeeaescececeseaueasceceensaaseeeeeenseaueaeeeeeeeseaueaseeeeeeeseaueaseeeeseeaeaaeness 532 S TROUBLE SHOO TING cosa asa 534 AP PENDEX Aya osa 536 A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments cccesceeeeeeeeneeeneeee seas ee saeeeneeeeeneaesasaeesaseeeeeaeeeseaesaseeeeeseeeseeeseseneeeeenees 536 A 2 10 100MbpS 10 100BaSe TXA a a A e se tete tee cecetedwcuudnencueaedexeceaunaeedeceteveeusnntuewsuevdearvuceduned 536 APPENDEXB GLOSSAR Y iii iia iaa 538 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 1 INTRODUTION The PLANET 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Ethernet Switch series WGSD switch are all multiple ports Gigabit Ethernet Switched with SFP fiber o
229. eived the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 en At this example VLAN Group 1 just set as default VLAN but only focus on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow Note Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 24 3 Remove VLAN Member for VLAN 1 Remember to remove the Port 1 Port 6 from VLAN 1 membership since the Port 1 Port 6 had be assigned to VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 Port Members AAA eee Ce ict ee EEE Ss sas Ya va va ea qua AIO 5 MN SEE Figure 4 6 9 Add new VLAN group assign VLAN members for VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 and remove specify ports from VLAN 1 member It s import to remove the VLAN members from VLAN 1 configuration Or the ports would become overlap setting About the overlapped VLAN configuration see next VLAN configure sample 4 Assign PVID for each port Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 PVID 2 125 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 PVID 3 Port 7 Port 24 PVID 1 5 Enable VLAN Tag for spec
230. elected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table The MLD Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4 8 15 appears MLD Snooping Groups Information Start from WLAN 1 and group address 00 with 20 entries per page vran 10 rours a 2falalsloPP efoli0 Auto refresh C Refresh Figure 4 8 15 MLD Snooping Groups Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh Cl Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Lk lt Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 13 MLDv2 Information Entries in the MLD SSM Information Table are shown on this page The MLD SSM Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Diffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 64 entries from the MLD SSM Source Specific Multicast Information
231. ements is reduced 113 VLAN Port Configuration User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 2 appears VLAN Port Configuration Mode EEE 202 10 vw Ingress Acceptable Set out layer LAN port PVID Frame rie Link Type Q in Q Mode tag ether ether type 1 PA PA PA PA E 1 PA PA PA z O O O O O O O O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 gt AECA aaa aaa aa ia Bl Eeee e eleele Figure 4 6 2 VLAN Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e PVID Allow assign PVID for selected port The range for the PVID is 1 4094 The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to VLAN group or the untagged traffic will be dropped Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering for a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark e Accept Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This para
232. ent message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 58 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values z My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Y act Y E ya Search Key Folders E Address Q my Network Places Network Tasks SZ 2 Add a network place LA a View network i g i connections y Y Set up a wireless network for a home or small office lt Q Search Active Directory 5 Hide icons For 3 networked UPnP VEE ar gt devices ay Other Places E Desktop PS Entire Network i My Computer 2 My Documents O O Ry Printers and Faxes fae on 10 1 1 26 FAE on planet m FAE_Files on 10 1 1 26 fileMKT_Public on file Print Server Print Server i i cd on Enm esther RDM HP5000 RDM HPLJ1320 enm on 10 1 1 20 enm on File ENM_Public on 10 1 1 20 ENM_Public on file Details ut NE Figure 4 2 10 UPnP devices shows on
233. ented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once lt also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Default Setting IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 6082 cdb9 19ab c0e2 IPv6 Address 1192 168 0 100 IPv6 Prefix 96 IPv6 Router Example Set IPv6 address WGSD 10020HP gt ip ipv6 setup 2001 0002 64 2100 0001 334 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series IPv6 Ping Description Ping IPv6 address ICMPv6 echo Syntax IP IPv6 Ping6 lt ipv6_addr gt lt ping_length gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 host address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ping_length gt Ping data length 8 1400 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers Example WGSD 10020HP gt ip ipv6 ping 20
234. entication Server statistics only Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed The Network Access Statistics screen in Figure 4 11 6 appears NAS Statistics Port 1 Port Auto refresh CI Port State Admin State Force Authorized Port State Globally Disabled Figure 4 11 6 Network Access Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Port State Object Description e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here 233 Port Counters Object Description User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states Force Authorized Force Unauthorized Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X Direction Name
235. er and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics E Requirements a Management Access Overview a Administration Console Access E Web Management Access a SNMP Access a Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements E Workstations of subscribers running Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista 7 2008 MAC OSS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platform compatible with TCP IP protocols a Workstation installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card a Serial Port connect Terminal e Above PC with COM Port DB9 RS 232 or USB to RS 232 converter ii Ethernet Port connect e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors a Above Workstation installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Managed Switch 38 3 2 Management Access Overview User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods E An administration console a Web browser interface a An external SNMP based network management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management met
236. er frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field THA settings 0 RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 208 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Any Any value is allowed don t care e Ethernet IP Parameters Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 Any Any value is allowed don t care The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected Object Description e IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for thi
237. er of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 6 appears IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page YLAN ID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier RV QI sec ORI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URI sec Figure 4 8 6 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e IGMP Snooping Enable Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected IGMP Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN e RV Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 e Qi Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between Gener
238. er that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4668 Name Description State Shows the state of the server It takes one of the 247 following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Round Trip radiusAuthCl
239. ere are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP RADIUS is an ac
240. erencing streaming_video video_si gnaling tagged untagged lt vlan_id gt lt I2_priority gt lt dscp gt Parameters voice Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications voice_signaling Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media guest_voice Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and 459 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services guest_voice_signaling Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media softphone_voice Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN video_conferencing Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services streaming
241. erview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports The Port Shapping screen in Figure 4 9 5 appears QoS Egress Port Shapers Shapers SSS eae a ao aia a2 os a os 06 o7 Port disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled 1 3 4 5 6 ra 8 3 10 Figure 4 9 5 QoS Egress Port Shapers page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 5 1 e QO Q7 Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Port Shows disabled or actual port
242. es IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Type Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below ype Maing Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is 0x11 Present Membership Report version 2 Leave a Group version 2 Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network
243. escription e Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled e Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period e Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds 260 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from th
244. esearchers had found in the previous system Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802 11i standard and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802 11i was prepared WPA is specifically designed to also work with pre WPA wireless network interface cards through firmware upgrades but not necessarily with first generation wireless access points WPA2 implements the full standard but will not work with some older network cards Wikipedia WPA PSK is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected_Access Pre Shared Key WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable 554 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 11i standard Wikipedia WPA Radius is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Radius 802 1X authentication server WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Per
245. et Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s SNMP function This section has the following items a System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page a System Information The system information is provides here a SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page 78 a SNMPv3 Users E SNMPv3 Groups a SNMPv3 Views a SNMPv3 Accesses User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 1 appears Read Com
246. et or show the IP DNS Proxy mode Syntax IP DNS_Proxy enable disable Parameters enable Enable DNS Proxy disable Disable DNS Proxy Default Setting disable Example Enable DNS proxy function WGSD 10020HP gt ip dns_proxy enable IPv6 AUTOCINFIG Description Set or show the IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Syntax IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG enable disable Parameters enable Enable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode disable Disable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Default Setting disable Example 333 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Enable IPv6 autoconfig function WGSD 10020HP gt ip ipv6 autoconfig enable IPv6 Setup Description Set or show the IPv6 setup Syntax IP IPv6 Setup lt ipv6_addr gt lt ipv6_prefix gt lt ipv6_router gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ipv6_prefix gt IPv6 subnet mask default Show IPv6 prefix lt ipv6_router gt IPv6 router default Show IPv6 router IPv6 address is in 128 bit records repres
247. et the max learn 10 groups for ICMP port throttling WGSD 10020HP gt ipmc throttling igmp 1 10 10 IPMC Filtering Description Set or show the IPMC port group filtering list Syntax IPMC Filtering mld igmp lt port_list gt add del group_adar Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port group filtering entry del Del existing port group filtering entry default Show IPMC port group filtering list group_addr IPv4 IPv6 multicast group address accordingly IPMC Router Description Set or show the IPMC snooping router port mode Syntax IPMC Router mld igmp lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD 516 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IPMC router port disable Disable IPMC router port default Show IPMC router port mode Example Enable port 1 in IPMC router port WGSD 10020HP gt ipmc riuter igmp 1 enable IPMC Status Description Show IPMC operational status accordingly Syntax IPMC Status mld igmp lt vid gt Parameters mldligmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN 1 IPMC operational status WGSD 10020HP gt ipmc stat
248. eters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled Dynamic Link up power savings enabled Enabled Link up and link down power savings enabled When set each port to run at 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full and 10M Half speed modes The Auto MDIX function will disable Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 90 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Refresh Click to refresh the page Any changes made locally will be undone 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4 4 2 appears Port Statistics Overview ort No co mm Qu ai co E O u oO a o a o So cof O Sos Sooo Soe E oO a o a o a o a o a oO a o a o a o o ooo0o0coeocecAandc O 3 O E O 13 oto E O u oO a o a o a o 1 2 3 4 5 6 FA 8 El 10 Sooo O E Auto refresh O Figure 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port e Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port e Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per
249. ets tightly Step4 Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step5 After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 9 34 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 0000000 Figure 2 9 Mounting WGSD 10020 in a Rack Step6 Proceeds with the steps 4 and steps 5 of session 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the Managed Switch 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Managed Switch As the Figure 2 10 appears SFP Transceiver y 1000Base SX LX LC Fiber Figure 2 10 Plug in the SFP transceiver 35 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET Managed Switch supports both Single mode and Multi mode SFP transceiver The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Gigabit SFP Transceiver modules MGB GT MGB SX MGB LX MGB L50 MGB L70 MGB L120 MGB LA10 MGB LA20 MGB LB20 MGB LA40 MGB LB40 SFP Port 1000Base T Module SFP Port 1000Base SX mini GBIC module SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 50KM SFP Port 10
250. f the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response G
251. fault IP Address of the Managed Switch with 192 168 0 100 And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the Managed Switch s 802 1x system configuration 12345678 at this case 1 Configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration Timeout ame seconds Dead Time Time seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration 192 168 0 253 290000000 Figure 4 11 10 RADIUS Server Configuration screenshot 2 Add New RADIUS Cleint on the Windows 2003 server 251 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Internet Authentication Service File Action View Help e menre gt Internet Authentication Service Local fem FRADIUS Clients iT Remote Acce New RADIUS Client EA Remote Acce 3 Connection R 3 CATest 192 168 0 5 RADIUS New b F View b Refresh Export List Help New Client 0 Pp p Figure 4 11 11 Windows Server add new RADIUS client setting Assign the client IP address to the Managed switch New RADIUS Client Name and ddress Type a friendly name and either an IP Address or DNS name for the client Friendly name 202 1 x Managed Switch Client address IP or DNS f 92 168 0 100 Verify lt Back Cancel Figure 4 11 12 Windows Server R
252. fer Protocol TFTP client BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP DHCP Relay DHCP Option82 User Privilege levels control NTP Network Time Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Protocol Cable Diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default PLANET Smart Discovery Utility for deploy management ICMPv6 gt Power over Ethernet WGSD 10020HP Only HM Complies with IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet End Span PSE Complies with IEEE 802 3at high power Power over Ethernet End Span PSE Up to 8 ports for IEEE 802 3af at devices powered Support PoE Power up to 30 8 watts for each PoE ports Auto detect powered device PD Circuit protection prevent power interference between ports Remote power feeding up to 100m PoE Management Total PoE power budget control Pert port PoE function enable disable PoE Port Power feeding priority Per PoE port power limit PD classification detection PD Alive check PoE schedule 25 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 1 5 Product Specification Hardware Specification Copper Ports 8 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports 2 1000Base SX LX BX SFP interfaces Port 9 and Port 10 SFP mini GBIC Slots Compatible with 100Base FX SFP IEEE 802 3x Pause Frame for Full Duplex Flow Control Back pressure for Half Duplex lt 5 seconds System reb
253. field that appears Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear e DIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation e DIP Mask ICMP Parameters Object When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation Description e ICMP Type Filter Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears e ICMP Type Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is O to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value e ICMP Code Filter Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value 210 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series appears e ICMP Code Value TCP UDP Parameters Object When Specific is selected for the
254. figuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain 540 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub o
255. frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable 408 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Show ACL action in port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network acl action 1 Port Action Rate Limiter Port Copy Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 Security Network ACL Policy Description Set or show the ACL port policy Syntax Security Network ACL Policy lt port_list gt lt policy gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy gt Policy number 1 8 Default Setting 1 Example Set ACL policy 2 for port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network acl policy 1 2 Security Network ACL Rate Description Set or show the ACL rate limiter Syntax Security Network ACL Rate lt rate_limiter_list gt lt rate_unit gt lt rate gt Parameters lt rate_limiter_list gt Rate limiter list 1 16 default All rate limiters 409 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt rate_unit gt IP flags pps kbps default pss lt rate gt Rate in pps 0 100 or kbps 0 100 2 100 3 100 1000000 Default Setting 1 Example Set rate limit value in 100 for port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network acl rate 1 100 Security Network ACL Add Description Add or modify Access Control Entry ACE If the ACE ID parameter lt ace_id gt is specified and an entr
256. frames only default Show accepted frame types Default Setting All Example Set port10 that allow tagged frames only WGSD 10020HP gt vlan frametype 10 tagged 351 VLAN Ingress Filter Description Set or show the port VLAN ingress filter Syntax VLAN IngressFilter lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable VLAN ingress filtering disable Disable VLAN ingress filtering default Show VLAN ingress filtering Default Setting Disable Example Enable VLAN ingress filtering for port10 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt vlan ingressfilter 10 enable VLAN Mode Description Set or show the VLAN Mode Syntax VLAN Mode portbased dot1q Parameters portbased Port Based VLAN Mode dotiq 802 1Q VLAN Mode default Show VLAN Mode Default Setting IEEE 802 1Q Example Set VLAN mode in port base 352 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt vlan mode portbased VLAN Link Type Description Set or show the port VLAN link type Syntax VLAN LinkType lt port_list gt untagged tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports untagged VLAN Link Type Tagged tagged VLAN Link Type Untagged default Show VLAN link type Default Setting Un tagged Example Enable tagged frame for port2 WGSD 10020HP gt vlan linktype 2 ta
257. g In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the IGMP join report is dropped IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 7 appears 160 User s Manual
258. g the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores Example Delete test account WGSD 10020HP gt security switch users delete user Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Description Show privilege configuration Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Example Show privilege level WGSD 10020HP gt security switch privilege level configuration Privilege Level Configuration Privilege Current Level 15 Group Name Priviliege Level 364 CRO CRW SRO SRW 5 10 5 10 15 15 15 15 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 15 15 15 15 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 Security Switch Privilege Level Group Description Configure a privilege level group Syntax User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Switch Privilege Level Group lt group_name gt lt cro gt lt crw gt lt sro gt lt srw gt Parameters 365 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt group_names gt Privilege group name lt cro gt Configuration read only privilege level 1 15 lt crw gt Configuration Execute read write privilege level 1 15 lt sro gt Status Statistics read only privilege level 1 15 lt srw gt Status Statistics read write privilege level 1 15 Example Change privilege level of MVR gro
259. ge information about their respective tx and rx wakeup time as a way to agree upon the minimum wakeup time they need 297 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP The LLDP Neighbors EEE Information screen in Figure 4 14 6 appears LLDP Neighbors EEE Information Local Port Fallback Receive Tw Echo Tx Tw Echo Rx Tw Resolved Tx Tw Resolved Rx Tw EEE activated No LLDP EEE information found Auto refresh C Figure 4 14 6 LLDP Neighbors EEE Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e Tx Tw The link parther s maximum time that transmit path can holdoff sending data after deassertion of LPI e Rx Tw The link parther s time that receiver would like the transmitter to holdoff to allow time for the receiver to wake from sleep Fallback Receive Tw The link parther s fallback receive Tw A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx Since a receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings this provides the transmitter with additional information that it may use for a more efficient allocation Systems that do not implement this option default the value to be the same as that of the Receive Tw_sys_tx e Echo Tx Tw The link partner s Echo Tx Tw value The re
260. ges Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 189 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 9 10 DSCP Classification This page allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value The DSCP Classification screen in Figure 4 9 12 appears DSCP Classification lt lt 1 lt 1 E w to to ta lt lt to ms lt w to tH tn lt lt to tr lt SO O 6 o O so o Oo 5 oO to ms lt lt 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 fi to i lt Auto refresh O Figure 4 9 12 DSCP Classification page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 can be configured for all available QoS Classes e DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 190 4 9 11 QoS Control List User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series This page shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list The QoS Control
261. gged VLAN Q in Q Mode Description Set or show the port Q in Q mode Syntax VLAN QinQ lt port_list gt disable man customer Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable Q in Q VLAN Mode man Q in Q MAN Port Mode customer Q in Q Customer Port Mode default Show VLAN QinQ Mode 353 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Set port2 in man port WGSD 10020HP gt vlan qing 2 man VLAN Ethernet Type Description Set or show out layer VLAN tag ether type in Q in Q VLAN mode Syntax VLAN Ethtype lt port_list gt man dot1q Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports man Set out layer VLAN tag ether type MAN dotiq Set out layer VLAN tag ether type 802 1Q default Show VLAN out layer VLAN tag ether type Default Setting N A Example Set out layer VLAN tag Ethernet type for port 10 in man Ethernet type WGSD 10020HP gt vlan ethtype 10 man VLAN Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Add lt vid gt lt name gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 354 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default Setting 1 Example Add port1 to port4 in VLAN10 WGSD 10020HP gt vlan add 10 1 4 VLAN Forbidden Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry in forbidde
262. gnificantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Buttons Static Y Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately k Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt Lz Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 118 4 6 7 VLAN Port Status User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series This page provides VLAN Port Staus The VLAN Port Status screen in Figure 4 6 5 appears VLAN Port Status for Static User Static PYID Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type UYID oe 1 2 3 4 5 6 l 8 9 0 Zn Sn gt UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto refresh C Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Figure 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status for Static User page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095
263. gure 4 9 14 QCE Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Members Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked e Key Parameters Key configuration are discribed as below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values 1 Any 2 Ethernet 193 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series LLC SNAP IPv4 Oy gi oe g IPv6 Note all frame types are explained below e Any Allow all types of frames e Ethernet Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within 0x600 OxFFFF or Any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 and Ox86DD IPv6 default value is Any e LLC SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destinatio
264. h Count Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen 1 Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorizal v Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorizal Y Globally Disabled Force Authorizal Y Globally Disabled Force Authorizad Y Globally Disabled Force Authorized Y Globally Disabled Force Authorizad Y Globally Disabled Force Authorizad Y Globally Disabled En 00 001 ek WwW N o Figure 4 11 4 Network Access Server Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames e Reauthentication If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated Enabled after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server 222 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port e Reauthentication Period Determ
265. h any frame type 201 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled e CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not
266. han 64 bytes 2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters Description Object e Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion e Tx Late Exc Coll Buttons The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions Click to refresh the page immediately Refresh clear J Clears the counters for all ports F 1 Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 94 4 4 5 SFP Information User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information page This page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed and wavelength and supports distance of SFP module on a specific interface You can also use the hyperlink of port no to check the statistics on a speficic interface The SFP Module Information screen in Figure 4 4 5 appears SFP Module Information Wave Length nm Distance m Auto Refresh O Figure 4 4 5 SFP Module Information for Switch page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Display the type of current SFP module the possible types are HM 1000Base SX M 1000Base LX MN 100Base FX e Speed Display the spedd of current SFP module the speed value or description is get from th
267. hapter 1 Section 4 and Specification Step4 Connect the Managed Switch to network devices Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 1000 RJ 45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers workstations or routers etc Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ 45 tips For more information please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A 33 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Step5 Supply power to the Managed Switch Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the Managed Switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green 2 2 2 Rack Mounting To install the Managed Switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follows the instructions described below Step1 Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 8 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch Figure 2 8 Attach brackets to the Managed Switch You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty Step3 Secure the brack
268. hbour Information Defined Untagged 46 Defined Untagged 32 Auto negotiation MAU Type status 100BaseTXFD 2 pair category 5 UTP full duplex mode Voice Voice Signaling Auto negotiation Capabilities 1000BASE T half duplex mode 1000BASE X LX SX CX full duplex mode Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE for full duplex inks Symmetric PAUSE for full duplex links Auto negotiation Enabled Supported Figure 4 14 3 LLDP MED Neighbor Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 291 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition Within the LLDP MED Endpoin
269. he 6 bit ToS field in the IP header The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit 0 63 TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value ALLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV 552 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption algorithm TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes the key used for each packet UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided
270. he capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class 1 and Media Endpoint Class II classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other 292 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management e LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identifica
271. he interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 319 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 5 2 Telnet Login The Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management The switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet please use admin for username amp password A Efx Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers NS WGSD 1 2 HP t 121 41 61 81 ttt Username admin Password Login in progress WGSD 14M020HP gt 320 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 Command Line Mode The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command A sample of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes supports specific software commands Command Groups System System settings and reset options IP IP configuration and Ping Port Port management MAC MAC address table VLAN Virtual LAN PVLAN Private VLAN Security Security management STP Spanning Tree Protocol Aggr Link Aggregation LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDPMED Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media EEE Energy Efficient Ethernet PoE Power Over Ethernet Thermal Thermal Protection Led_powe
272. he terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 40 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 3 4 Web Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the switch you can access the Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Browser IP Address 192 168 0 100 TEI i RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Adress 192 168 0 x Figure 3 3 Web management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 0 or later Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later P WGSD 10020 A WGSD 10020 Welcome to PLANET WGSD 10020 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 2 100 1000X SFP Management Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R 0 C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email Support planet com tw Copyright 2011 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 3 4 Web main screen of Managed Switch 41 User
273. hernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed 195 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column e Conflict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releaseing the resource required by the QCE and pressing Refresh button Buttons Combined de Select the QCL status from this drop down list Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone 4 9 13 Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded
274. his can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic Therefore running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen in Figure 4 15 4 appears VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Raz Cable Status INN TT Figure 4 15 4 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics 303 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair Buttons Start Click to run the diagnostics 304 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 16 Power over Ethernet WGSD 10020HP Providing up to 8 PoE in line power interface the WGSD 10020HP PoE Switch can easily build a power central controlled IP phone system IP Camera system AP group for the enterprise For instance 8 camera AP can be easily installed around the corner in the company for surveillance demands or bu
275. hods Method Console Web Browser e SNMP Agent e Advantages No IP address or subnet needed Text based Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems Secure Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Compatible with all popular browsers Can be accessed from any location Most visually appealing Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level Based on open standards Disadvantages Must be near switch or use dial up connection Not convenient for remote users Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask May encounter lag times on poor connections Requires SNMP manager software Least visually appealing of all three methods Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Management Methods Comparison 3 3 Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the switch s console serial port There are two ways to use this management method via direct access or modem port access The following sections
276. ices implementing SNMP 550 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 pr
277. ics Object Description e Transmit to Server The packets number that relayed from client to server e Transmit Error The packets number that errors sending packets to clients e Receive form Server The packets number that received packets from server e Receive Missing Agent The packets number that received packets without agent information options Option e Receive Missing The packets number that received packets which the Circuit ID option was 61 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Circuit ID missing Receive Missing Remote ID The packets number that received packets which Remote ID option was missing Receive Bad Circuit ID The packets number that the Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID Receive Bad Remote The packets number that the Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID ID Client Statistics Object Description Transmit to Client The packets number that relayed packets from server to client Transmit Error The packets number that error sending packets to servers Receive form Client The packets number that received packets from server Receive Agent Option The packets number that received packets with relay agent information option e Replace Agent Option The packets number that replaced received packets with relay agent information option e Keep Agent Optin The packets number that keepped received packets
278. ides MVR related configuration The MVR screen in Figure 4 8 17 appears MVR Configuration MYR Mode Disabled v OS 1D Bestel y Port Configuration NS SS SNS SN SNS S S ILS S SS SSS IIS Figure 4 8 17 MVR Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR e VLAN ID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID e Mode Enable MVR on the port 172 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Type Specify the MVR port type on the port e Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 15 MVR Status This page provides MVR status The MVR Status screen in Figure 4 8 18 appears MVR Statistics LAN ID 1 Reports 2 Reports 3 Reports 2 Leaves Received Received Received Received 100 Auto refresh C Figure 4 8 18 MVR Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group The Multicast VLAN ID e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports e V2 Leave Received The number of Received V2 Leaves Buttons Click t
279. ient The time interval measured in milliseconds between Time ExtRoundTripTim the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and e the Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet RADIUS Accounting Servers The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4670 Name Description Rx Responses radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS Responses packets valid or invalid received from the server Rx Malformed radiusAccClientExt The number of malformed Responses MalformedRespons RADIUS packets received es from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses 248 Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Tx Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Requests Retransmissions Pending Requests Timeouts User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series radiusAcctClientExt BadAuthenticators radiusAccClientExt UnknownTypes radiusAccClientExt PacketsDropped radiusAccC
280. ients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form XX XX XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that 227 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate
281. iew ie adres 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable Auto Refresh O Figure 4 11 8 RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Servers Object Description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled 243 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Servers Object Description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port nu
282. ific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears e TCP UDP Destination Number When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value e TCP UDP Destination When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a Range specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value e TCP FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE 211 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP RST Specify the TCP Reset the connec
283. ific ports Link Type Port 3 VLAN 2 and Port 6 VLAN 3 The Per Port VLAN configuration in Figure 4 6 10 appears Acceptable Set out layer Frame Link Type Q in Q Mode VLAN tag Type ether type Ingress Filtering ee i lt lt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ESS Ee E E E E SS SSN SNS SS SINS OOOOO0O0000 lt lt Figure 4 6 10 Port 1 Port 6 VLAN Configuration 4 6 10 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware switch The most cases are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access with other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 6 11 appears 126 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Tagged PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Tagged _ ee VLAN 3 eee ee Ne ee a ee ear PC 1 PC 4 Untagged Untagged a x m m m e e e e e a e de ee Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 2 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 24 About the VLAN ports connect to the hosts please refer to 4 6 10 1 examples The following steps will focus on the VLAN Trunk
284. iguration sci itea a epa eaa eea a aae ea A nd estas aa eaae a dees 451 PGP ea C E EAE tes ANN EA EA TE EE AE A ET EA E A EA a 451 MO Ann e vee nie ee e ete eee eee lie eee 452 LLDP Interval etsii A da SHA ed 453 BIL DP OIG oe aces coto dd rs ot lts dido 453 LEDE Delay smc tacioo motes cuco adi the coros endo dd cc wad add ed a dl do o di end do aro tae ld ad 454 LLORA ii da 454 EL DP Statistics iii 455 DP Or O a dao ll o ad da 456 6 12 LLDPMED Command iint A idas 457 LEDPMED Configuration scort odas 457 LEDPMED Civic cata mera te cata ad oe e Nth dota Bnet a Oe Noes eN ad e oe A e adds Ue dB one 457 LLDPMED ECS aaa 458 HEDPMED Policy Delete cto e eras ao CA e a e ee 459 ILDPMED Policy Add 10 tu se ch kt co acts eo led oe ira ee celo fede ele slo o e ole 459 LLDPMED Port Policy AEREE EE cnc rr 460 LLDPMED Coordinates miii A sh de ee 461 ULDPMED Datum a A eee e een Se ee 461 UL DPMED FaSt curada E E AA 462 LEDPMED Infos cet ceuta E coco dende dd seas o and ahead eta dl He ncaa ndo dd odo dl Be eo dl aha add SPD ed 462 14 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 13 EEE COMMANO ar a eee a a a e aa eaa a A is adela 463 BARALE a a Aa EE EE EE E E EE A aci n 463 EEE M de cmo a e e e a e ela ce RH ee S 463 EBEE Urgent Queues EE A T E E E A N T E T 464 6 14 Power over Ethernet Command sssssssssuunrunnreunneunneunnnunnnnunnnnnnennnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn munnen nnmnnn nannan 465 PoE Gonfiguratione
285. iguration Example Show PoE configuration WGSD 10020HP gt poe configuration Port Mode AF AT Mode Priority Max Power W Enabled 802 3at Enabled 802 3at Enabled 802 3at Enabled 802 3at Enabled 802 3at Enabled 802 3at Enabled 802 3at Enabled 802 3at Disabled 802 3at Disabled 802 3at Power management mode Power management mode consumption PoE Mode Description Set or show the PoE mode Syntax PoE Mode lt port_list gt enable disable 465 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series PowerAlloc W Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enables PoE disable Disable PoE default Show PoE s mode Default Setting enable Example Disable PoE function of port1 4 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt poe mode1 4 disable AF AT Mode Description Allows user to set up 802 3af type1 or 802 3at type2 mode to per port Syntax PoE mode lt port_list gt aflat Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports af IEEE 802 3af mode at IEEE 802 3at mode PoE Priority Description Show Set PoE Priority Syntax PoE Priority lt port_list gt low high critical Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports low Set priority to low high Set priority to high critical Set priority to critical default Show PoE priority Default Setting high 466 User
286. iguration sistini ida iii aaie aeaeaei ia aia 363 Security Switch Usd high E T AET 363 Security Switch User Delete iii sien eed ddl eit sie eli ee 364 Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration o ooconnnccnnnnocicnnocccnnononnncnonncnn nono nn nn nor r rr nana rra 364 Security Switch Privilege Level GrOUP ooooocccnoncconoccccnononcncnonncnononnncnn no nn nn nano nara rre rra 365 Security Switch Privilege Level CurTONt ooococonccononcccnnnoncccnononnno nono ncnn non cnn nono cnn nan edane rra 366 Security Switch Auth Configuration ooonccccnonicononcccnononcnnnnnannnn nono cn nn nn nn rra anne rr rr 366 Security Switch Auth Method coincida 367 Security Switch SSH Configuracion ii cin 368 Security Switch SSH Mod a e aaa aa aaa E a a a raaa Aaaa a Ae A aeaaaee iea Sidat 368 Security Switch HTTPs Configurati0N oooocoonnccnnonocinnnoncncnonannno nono nc nono n nn rra nora 369 Security Switch HTTPS Mode siisii te iian io 369 Security Switch HTTPSs Redirect piicata nas ic ee 370 Security Switch Access CONTFIGULTAtiON oooocccnocccnnoncccnanoncncnonancnn nono cnnn non nn craneo 370 Security Switch Access Mode ui sessed ies deeded eset sbee adie dae even e edie ceesebeh teddteneeedieeesedadeeseetes 371 Security Switch Access Configuration oooocccnocccnnoccccnonancncnonancnn nono cnnn non n rn nano rre 371 Security Switch Access Mode civic od 372 security Switch Access Add ii rei 372 Security Switch Access IPV6 Add cui blas 373
287. ild a wireless roaming environment in the office Without the power socket limitation the PoE Switch makes the installation of cameras or WLAN AP more easily and efficiently WGSD 10020HP i 10 A WGSD 10020HP Power Over Ethernet Status Current Power Consumption O as f 79 875 150 WW Total Power Reserved MS ti E 76 825 150 W Temperature 1 48 0 4118 F Temperature 2 45 0 4113 F Local Port PD class Power Used W Current Used mA Priority Port Status PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF 79 875 W 1428 mA Auto Refresh Refresh Updating Figure 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Status 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Powered Device Voice over IP phones Enterprise can install POE VoIP Phone ATA and other Ethernet non Ethernet end devices to the central where UPS is installed for un interrupt power system 3 5 watts and power control system Wireless LAN Access Points Museum Sightseeing Airport Hotel Campus Factory Warehouse can install the Access Point any where with no hesitation 6 12 watis 3 IP Surveillance 3 Enterprise Museum Campus Hospital Bank can install IP Camera without limits of install location no need electrician to install AC sockets 10 12 watts 305 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series PoE Splitter PoE Splitter split the PoE 56V DC over the Ethernet cable into 5 12V DC power output It frees the device depl
288. in topics m IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control m MAC Based Authentication m User Authentication Overview of 802 1X Port Based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it
289. ines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds e EAPOL Timeout Determines the time between retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports e Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses a Single 802 1X a Multi 802 1X a MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in a 802 1X based mode this is not so criticial since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way
290. information is provided here The System Log screen in Figure 4 2 14 appears System Log Information The total number of entries is 4 for the given level Start from ID 1 with 20 entries per page Info Switch just made a cool boot Info 1970 01 01T00 00 06 00 00 Link up on port 1 Info 1970 01 01T00 15 11 00 00 Link up on port 7 Info 1970 01 01700 16 33 00 00 Link down on port 1 Figure 4 2 14 System Log page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Level The level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Info Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels e Time The time of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Auto refresh CI Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone clear J Clear all statistics e Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed La Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID 64 User s Manual of WGSD
291. ing IEEE Std 802 3ae 2002 2003 Page s 0_1 121 White Paper on Power over Ethernet IEEE802 3af http www poweroverethernet com articles php article_id 52 Microsemi PowerDsine http www microsemi com PowerDsine Linear Tech http www linear com The PoE Provision Process While adding PoE support to networked devices is relatively painless it should be realized that power cannot simply be transferred over existing CAT 5 cables Without proper preparation doing so may result in damage to devices that are not designed to support provision of power over their network interfaces The PSE is the manager of the PoE process In the beginning only small voltage level is induced on the port s output till a valid PD is detected during the Detection period The PSE may choose to perform classification to estimate the amount of power to be consumed by this PD After a time controlled start up the PSE begins supplying the 48 VDC level to the PD till it is physically or electrically disconnected Upon disconnection voltage and power shut down Since the PSE is responsible for the PoE process timing it is the one generating the probing signals prior to operating the PD and monitoring the various scenarios that may occur during operation All probing is done using voltage induction and current measurement in return Stages of powering up a PoE link Volts specified Volts managed per 802 3af by chipset Measure whether powered device has the
292. ing identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 386 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series md5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol The allowed length is 8 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 sha An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The allowed length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase des An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES privacy protocol privacy protocol should belong to The allowed string length is 8 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Add SNMPv3 user entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp user add 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3 md5 12345678 des abcdefgh Security Switch SNMP User Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 user entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 user entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp user delete 1
293. ink Aggregation Support 5 groups of 10 Port trunk support Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR 8 level priority for switching Port Number 802 1p priority 802 1Q VLAN tag DSCP TOS field in IP Packet IGMP v1 v2 v3 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups IGMP Snooping IGMP Querier mode support MLD v1 v2 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups MLD Snooping MLD Querier mode support IP Based ACL MAC Based ACL Access Control List Up to 123 entries Per port bandwidth control Bandwidth Control Ingress 500Kb 80Mbps Egress 64Kb 80Mbps RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB 27 Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance Standards Compliance User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB RFC3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE 802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX 100Base FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1d Spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3at
294. instance where the column displays the following information The Bridge Status screen in Figure 4 7 8 appears STP Bridges Root aver Topology CIST 80 00 00 30 4F 10 02 00 s0 00 00 30 4F 10 02 00 Steady Auto refresh O Refresh Refresh Figure 4 7 8 STP Bridge Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge this is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance e Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred 143 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 7 4 CIST Port Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well The CIST Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 9 appears STP CIST Port Configuration CIST Aggregated Port Configuration STP Pence Point to E Enabled Path Cost priori Admin Edge Auto Edge ren P2 Guard calle 128 Non Edge Y Forel Tue Y
295. ion and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons 542 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the
296. ion ipmc ip_source_guard conflicts Parameters combined Shows the combined status static Shows the static user configured status dhcp Shows the status by DHCP upnp Shows the status by UPnP arp_inspection Shows the status by ARP Inspection ip_source_guard Shows the status by IP Source Guard Example conflicts Shows all conflict status default Shows the combined status Show ACL status WGSD 10020HP gt security network acl status Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Description Show DHCP relay configuration Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Example Show DHCP relay configuration WGSD 10020HP gt security network dhcp relay configuration DHCP Relay Configuration DHCP Relay Mode Disabled 413 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series DHCP Relay Server NULL DHCP Relay Information Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Information Policy replace Security Network DHCP Relay Mode Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP relaly mode When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered disable Disable DHCP relaly mode default Show flow DHCP relaly mode Default Setting
297. ion is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP 539 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Con
298. ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask lt ip_router gt IP router a b c d default Show IP router lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show VLAN ID Default Setting IP Address 192 168 0 100 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID 21 Example Set IP address WGSD 10020HP gt ip setup 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 331 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series IP Ping Description Ping IP address ICMP echo Syntax IP Ping lt ip_addr_string gt lt ping_length gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt ping_length gt Ping data length 8 1400 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers Example WGSD 10020HP gt ip ping 192 168 0 21 PING server 192 168 0 21 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 3 time 10ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad IP DNS Description Set or show the DNS server address Syntax IP DNS lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Showdne IP address Default Setting 0 0 0 0 Example Set DNS IP address 332 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt ip dns 168 95 1 1 IP DNS Proxy Description S
299. iption e Selected Counters The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following administrative states Multi 802 1X 237 Attached MAC Address Object User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Description e Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth e MAC Address For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached e VLAN ID e State This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the una
300. is incorrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at whose own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Energy Saving Note of the Device This power required device does not support Standby mode operation For energy saving please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit Without removing power cable the device will still consuming power from the power source In the view of Saving the Energy and reduce the unnecessary power consuming it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active WEEE Warning To avoid the potenti
301. istener Query Interval in tenths of seconds default Show IPMC Interface Last Listener Query Interval IPMC Parameter URI Description Set or show the IPMC Unsolicited Report Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter URI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_uri Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_uri 1 Default Value 1 0 31744 Unsolicited Report Interval in seconds default Show IPMC Interface Unsolicited Report Interval 521 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 25 VLAN Control List Command VCL MAC based VLAN Configuration Description Show VCL MAC based VLAN configuration Syntax VCL Macvlan Configuration VCL MAC based VLAN Add Description Add or modify VCL MAC based VLAN entry Syntax VCL Macvlan Add lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Add 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 in VLAN 20 for all port User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt vel macvlan add 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 20 1 10 VCL MAC based VLAN Delete Description Delete VCL MAC based VLAN entry Syntax VCL Macvlan Del lt mac_addr gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX 522 User s Manual of WGSD 1002
302. istrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MDS is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPv 6 instead of using a separate protocol 545 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Multicast VLAN Regist
303. itch s ports This section has the following items Port Configuration Port Statistics Overview Port Thermal Protection Status Port Statistics Detail SFP Module Information Port Mirror 4 4 1 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics Display thermal protection status Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics Display SFP information Sets the source and target ports for mirroring This page displays current port configurations Ports can also be configured here The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 4 1 appears 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g Port Configuration Flow Control Maximum Excessive Power Configured Configured Frame Size Collision Mode Control 9600 ESE J 4S SS SS SISSIES OOOOO00000 KKK KKK KKK XK KX XXXXXXXXX The page includes the following fields Pa Figure 4 4 1 Port Configuration page screenshot Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down e Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port 89 e Configured Link Speed User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Select any available link speed for the given
304. ith 120 entries per page VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Auto refresh O Figure 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No 279 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MA
305. itted Unknown Illegal 0 E oO E Oo e o a o o E oO a Oo a o a o o E O E O E O lomo 1 Ze 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 EN O E O E OO E CO _ Auto refresh C Figure 4 5 7 LACP Statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately clear Clears the counters for all ports 106 4 6 VLAN 4 6 1 VLAN Overview User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a colle
306. ity mode System offers PoE power according to per port priority setting when power consumption has been over total power budget The default POE management mode is Consumption mode e Power Supply Budget Set limit value of the total PoE port provided power to the PDs W For WGSD 10020HP the available max Value is 150 e Temperature Allows setting over temperature protection threshold value It system Threshold temperature was over it then system lower total POE power budget automatically e PoE Usage Threshold Allows setting how much PoE power budget could be limited Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Bry es For WGSD 10020HP the total PoE power reservation from Port 1 8 is up to 150W Note PD Classifications APD may be classified by the PSE based on the classification information provided by the PD The intent of PD classification is to provide information about the maximum power required by the PD during operation Class 0 is the default for PDs However to improve power management at the PSE the PD may opt to provide a signature for Class 1 to 4 The PD is classified based on power The classification of the PD is the maximum power that the PD will draw across all input voltages and operational modes APD shall return Class 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4 16 1 3
307. k to disable or none To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device be rebooted You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx A 1000 LNK ACT Y 10 100 LNK ACT miniGBIC LE SE E SE S E n TEEN a O A O E A cee o RESET Hardware Reset button 4 2 21 System Reboot The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user have to re login the WEB interface about 60 seconds later the System Reboot screen in Figure 4 2 29 appears System Reboot Are you sure you want to perform a System Reboot Figure 4 2 29 System Reboot page screenshot 76 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Yes Click to reboot the system No Click to return to the Port State page without reboot the system You can also check the SYS LED at the front panel to identify the System is load completely or not If the SYS LED is blinking then it is in the firmware load stage if the SYS LED light on you can use the WEB browser to login the Switch 77 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol 4 3 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part o
308. knownTypes radiusAuthClientExtP acketsDropped radiusAuthClientExtA Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes received from the server The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent Requests Tx Access Retransmissio ns Tx Pending Requests Tx Timeouts User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series ccessRequests radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRetransmission S radiusAuthClientExtP endingRequests radiusAuthClientExtT imeouts to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the serv
309. l 0 1 to PCP and DEI Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking Map lt port_list gt lt class_list gt lt dpl_list gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class_list gt QoS class list or all default All QoS classes 0 7 lt dpl_list gt DP level list or all default All DP levels 0 1 lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 QoS Port DSCP Translation Description Set or show DSCP ingress translation mode If translation is enabled for a port incoming frame DSCP value is translated and translated value is used for QoS classification Syntax QoS Port DSCP Translation lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable DSCP ingress translation disable Disable DSCP ingress translation default Show DSCP ingress translation mode Default Setting disable 484 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Enable DSCP ingress translation on all port WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port DSCP Translation 1 10 enable QoS Port DSCP Classification Description Set or show DSCP classification based on QoS class and DP level This enables per port to map new DSCP value based on QoS class and DP level Syntax QoS Port DSCP Classification lt port_list gt none zero selected all Parameters lt port_list gt Port
310. l of WGSD 10020 Series STP Port Mode Description Set or show the STP enabling for a port Syntax STP Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Enable Enable MSTP protocol Disable Disable MSTP protocol Default disable Example Enable STP function on port WGSD 10020HP gt stp port mode 1 enable STP Port Edge Description Set or show the STP adminEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port Edge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Edge Disable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Non edge Default disable Example Enable STP edge function on port1 437 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt stp port edge 1 enable STP Port AutoEdge Description Set or show the STP autoEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port AutoEdge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Enable MSTP autoEdge Disable Disable MSTP autoEdge Default enable Example Disable STP edge function on portt WGSD 10020HP gt stp port autoedge 1 disable STP Port P2P Description Set or show the STP point2point port parameter Syntax STP Port P2P lt port_list gt enable disable auto Parameters lt port_list gt Port lis
311. le Parameters enable Enable DHCP snooping mode When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports disable Disable DHCP snooping mode default Show flow DHCP snooping mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP snooping mode WGSD 10020HP gt security network dhcp snooping mode enable Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping port mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode lt port_list gt trusted untrusted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message default Show flow DHCP snooping port mode 417 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default Setting trusted Example Set untrusted DHCP snooping port mode in port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network dhcp snooping port mode 1 untrusted Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP snooping statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear DHCP snooping statistics Example Show DHCP snooping statistics of port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network
312. le Show RADIUS statistics WGSD 10020HP gt security aaa statistics 428 6 8 Spanning Tree Protocol Command STP Configuration Description Show STP configuration Syntax STP Configuration Example Show STP configuration WGSD 10020HP gt stp cofiguration STP Configuration Protocol Version MSTP Max Age 20 Forward Delay 15 Tx Hold Count 6 Max Hop Count 20 BPDU Filtering Disabled BPDU Guard Disabled Error Recovery Disabled STP Version Description Set or show the STP Bridge protocol version Syntax STP Version lt stp_version gt Parameters lt stp_version gt mstp rstp stp Default Setting MSTP 429 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Set the STP Bridge protocol version WGSD 10020HP gt stp version rstp STP Tx Hold Description Set or show the STP Bridge Transmit Hold Count parameter Syntax STP Txhold lt holdcount gt Parameters lt holdcount gt STP Transmit Hold Count 1 10 Default Setting 6 Example Set STP Tx hold in 10 WGSD 10020HP gt stp txhold 10 STP MaxHops Description Set or show the MSTP Bridge Max Hop Count parameter Syntax STP MaxHops lt maxhops gt Parameters lt maxhops gt STP BPDU MaxHops 6 40 Default Setting 20 430 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Set STP maximum hops in 25 WGSD 10020HP gt
313. le Use RADIUS authentication method for telnet WGSD 10020HP gt security switch auth method telnet radius enable 367 Security Switch SSH Configuration Description Show SSH configuration Syntax Security Switch SSH Configuration Example Show SSH configuration WGSD 10020HP gt security switch ssh configuration SSH Mode Enable Security Switch SSH Mode Description Set or show the SSH mode Syntax Security Switch SSH Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SSH disable Disable SSH default Show SSH mode Default Setting enable Example Enable SSH function User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt security switch ssh mode enable 368 Security Switch HTTPs Configuration Description Show HTTPS configuration Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Configuration Example Show HTTPs configuration WGSD 10020HP gt security switch https configuration HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Mode Enable HTTPS Redirect Mode Disabled Security Switch HTTPs Mode Description Set or show the HTTPS mode Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs disable Disable HTTPs default Show HTTPs mode Default Setting enable Example Enable HTTPs function User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt security switch https mode enable 369 Security Switch HTTPs Redirect Description
314. le view type are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and it s OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry e OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk Buttons Add new view Click to add a new view entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 86 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 3 4 5 SNMPv3 Access Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Access screen in Figure 4 3 8 appears SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name O default_ro group any NoAuth NoPriv default_view Y None vi d default_rw_group any NoAuth NoPriv default_view v default_view Y Figure 4 3 8 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group nam
315. led v Port Mode Configuration SES ESSE ESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Figure 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping Configuration screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation e Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message Buttons 269 Save User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping The statistics only counter packet under DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for system DHCP client The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 9 appears DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Port 1 Potl v Receive Packets Transmit Packets Tx Discover Tx Offer Tx Request Tx Decline Tx ACK Tx NAK Tx Release Tx Inform Tx Lease Que
316. lick on the Save button you need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup 4 Only accept command in lowercase letter under web interface 45 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 1 Main Web Page The SGSW Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Main Functions Menu Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status P WGSD 10020 21 WGSD 10020 Welcome to PLANET WGSD 10020 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 2 100 1000X SFP Management Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email Support planet com tw Copyright 2011 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 4 1 4 Main Page Main Screen Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link RJ 45 Ports i El SFP Ports e
317. lientExt Requests radiusAccClientExt Retransmissions radiusAccClientExt PendingRequests radiusAccClientExt Timeouts The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types that were received from the server on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response timeout or retransmission The number of accounting timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a 249 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info Refresh This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4670 Name Description State Round Trip Time Click to refresh the p
318. ling_street_suffix str_suf house_no house_no_ suffix landmark additional_info name zip_code building apartment floor room_number place_type postal_com_name p_o box additional_code Trailing street suffix Street Suffix House Number House number suffix Landmark or vanity address Additional location information Bame residence and office occupant Postal zip code Building structure Unit apartment suite Floor Room number Placetype Postal community name Post office box P O Box Addtional code default Show Civic Address Location configuration lt civic_value gt lldpmed The value for the Civic Address Location entry LLDPMED ECS Description Set or show LLDP MED Emergency Call Service 458 City division borough city district ward chou JP Syntax LLDPMED ecs lt ecs_value gt Parameters lt ecs_value gt lldpmed The value for the Emergency Call Service LLDPMED Policy Delete Description Delete the selected policy Syntax LLDPMED policy delete lt policy_list gt Parameters lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete Example Delete the policy 1 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt IIdpmed policy delete 1 LLDPMED Policy Add Description Adds a policy to the list of polices Syntax LLDPMED policy add voice voice_signaling guest_voice guest_voice_signaling softphone_voice video_conf
319. link indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 30 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Per 100 1000Base X SFP interfaces Function Lights to indicate the link through that port is successfully established Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Lights to indicate the link through that port is successfully established Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Figure 2 4 WGSD 10020HP LED panel System Color Function ETE Lights to indicate that the fan is fail pwr Green Lights to indicate that the Switch has power Per 10 100 1000Mbps port Color Function Lights to indicate the port is providing 52VDC in line power orange Off indicate the connected device is not a POE Powered Device PD 1000 Lights to indicate the port is running in 1000Mbps speed and successfully established LNK ACT Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 10 100 Lights to indicate the port is running in 10 100Mbps speed and successfully established LNK ACT Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Per 100 1000Base X SFP interfaces Function Lights to indicate the link through that port is successfully established Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Lights to indicate
320. list gt Port list or all default All ports 456 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 12 LLDPMED Command LLDPMED Configuration Description Show LLDP MED configuration Syntax LLDPMED Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LLDP MED configuration of port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt IIdpmed configuration 1 4 LLDP MED Configuration Fast Start Repeast Count 4 Location Coordinates Latitude 0 0000 North Longitude 0 0000 East Altitude 0 0000 meter s Map datum WGS84 Civic Address Location Policies none none none none LLDPMED Civic Description Set or show LLDP MED Civic Address Location 457 Syntax LLDPMED Civic User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series country state county city district block street leading_street_direction trailing_street_suffix str_suf house_no house_no_s uffix landmark additional_info name zip_code building apartment floor room_number place_type postal_com_name p_o box additional_code lt civic_value gt Parameters country state county city district block street Country National subdivisions state caton region province prefecture County parish gun JP district IN City townchip shi JP Neighborhood block Street leading_street_direction Leading street direction trai
321. list or all default All ports none No DSCP ingress classification zero Classify DSCP if DSCP 0 selected Classify DSCP for which class mode is enable all Classify all DSCP default Show port DSCP ingress classification mode Default Setting none Example Set DSCP classification based on QoS class and DP level in zero WGSD 10020HP gt QoS Port DSCP Classification 1 10 zero QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark Description Set or show the port DSCP remarking mode Syntax QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark lt port_list gt disable enable remap_dp_unaware remap_dp_aware Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 485 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series disable Disable DSCP egress rewrite enable Enable DSCP egress rewrite with the value received from analyzer remap_dp_unaware Rewrite DSCP in egress frame with remapped DSCP where remap is DP unaware or DP 0 remap_dp_aware Rewrite DSCP in egress frame with remapped DSCP where remap is DP aware and DP 1 default Show port DSCP egress remarking mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DSCP egress rewrite WGSD 10020HP gt QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark 1 10 enable QoS DSCP Map Description Set or show DSCP mapping table This table is used to map QoS class and DP level based on DSCP value DSCP value used to map QoS class and DPL is either translated DSCP value or incoming frame DSCP value Syntax
322. llowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users Configure SNMP trap on this page The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 2 appears SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Mode Trap Version Trap Community Trap Destination Address Trap Destination IPv6 Address Trap Authentication Failure Trap Link up and Link down Trap Inform Mode Trap Inform Timeout seconds Trap Inform Retry Times Re Figure 4 3 2 SNMP Trap Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields i Object Description e Trap Mode Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation e Trap Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 e Trap Community Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Trap Destination Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address e Trap Destination IPv6 Address Provide the trap destination IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For ex
323. lsisisaialisi ziBlalalealslisisial sielz lrlBlsiSieisialslalalealSi s s JOB BDO BDO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DO DODODODDAO gt 9 ES EE ES EE 9 VE 9 9 AAARAA on t Ww LO CC E AIA QI SIA SIS SISVlRIBlARlSlAIVIS RISIGVisiS Sisl SIBlIS BIS SIaAlAl Sl RIBSiSis 188 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The page includes the following fields Auto refresh C Figure 4 9 11 DSCP Translation page screenshot Object Description e DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 e Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation Translate Classify e Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values e Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side e Egress There are following configurable parameters for Egress side Remap DPO Remap DP1 There is following configurable parameter for Egress side Remap e Remap DPO Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 e Remap DP1 Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 e Remap Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 Buttons Save Click to save chan
324. lticast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second e URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields k lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID ER gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and MLD throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join MLD filtering en
325. ly and revert to previously saved values 56 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 2 6 NTP Configuration Configure NTP on this page NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP data grams as transport layer You can specify NTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The NTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 8 appears NTP Configuration Mode Disable y GMT 0 Casablanca Monrovia Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London v polnpog O europe pool ntp org north america pool ntp org asia pool ntp org oceania pool ntp org Figure 4 2 8 NTP Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the NTP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable NTP mode operation When enable NTP mode operation the agent forward and to transfer NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Disabled Disable NTP mode operation e Timezone Allow select the time zone according to current location of switch e Server Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16
326. ly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items m Ping m Pv6 Ping m Remote IP Ping m Cable Diagnostic PING The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The Managed Switch transmit ICMP packets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics performing tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two statuses as follow m Ifthe link is established on the twisted pair interface in 1000Base T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer m If the link is established in 100Base TX or 10Base T the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are running After the diagnostics are finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are available m Coupling between cable pairs m Cable pair termination Cable Length 4 15 1 Ping This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP co
327. m port address VLAN IP address and IP mask input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e IP Address The IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Car Flushes all dynamic entries e Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry af
328. m pr Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the Managed Switch by select the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears 46 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series ement Link Aggregation gt VLAD Spanning Tree Multicas gt QO os p Ac Control List LLDP Diagnostics Figure 4 1 5 Managed Switch Main Functions Menu 47 4 2 System User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items System Information IP Configuration IPv6 Configuration Users Configuration Privilege Levels NTP Configuration UPnP DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Statistics CPU Load System Log Detailed Log Remote Syslog LED Power Reduction EEE Power Reduction Thermal Protection Web Firmware Upgrade TFTP Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup Configuration Upload Image Select Factory Default System Reboot The switch system information is provided here Configure the switch managed IP information on this page Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page This page provide
329. management mode is enabled Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately cea J Clear all statistics 4 12 4 HTTPs Configure HTTPS on this page The HTTPS Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 4 appears HTTPS Configuration Disabled v Automatic Redirect Disabled v Figure 4 12 4 HTTPS Configuration screen page screenshot 264 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 5 SSH Configure SSH on this page This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC
330. mber in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 11 8 RADIUS Details This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server The RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 9 appears 244 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1812 Auto Refresh CI Server 1 Y Receive Packets Transmit Packets Access Accepts Access Requests Access Rejects Access Retransmissions Access Challenges Pending Requests Malformed Access Responses Timeouts Bad Authenticators Unknown Types
331. mber of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Receive The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Receive The number of Received V3 Reports e V2 Leave Receive Buttons Refresh The number of Received V2 Leave Click to refresh the page immediately _ clear J Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh _ Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 162 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 8 6 IGMP Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table The IGMP Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4 8 9 appears IGMP Snooping Groups Information Start from VLAN 1 and group address 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port Members vran 10 Grouns 2 a s o 2 e o zo No more entries No more entries Auto refresh O Figure 4 8 9 IGMP Snooping Groups Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group add
332. mbers of the same VLAN but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other 121 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Promiscuous Promiscuous Permit Public Servers pa PA Access Deny Access Deny Access Deny Private VLAN Port Isolate For private VLANs to be applied the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place one or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups E Promiscuous ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN E Isolated ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which for
333. membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server 543 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of informati
334. ment with WGSD 10020HP Interval Time 10 300s This column allows user to set how long system should be issue a ping request to PD for detecting PD is alive or dead Interval time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds e Retry Count 1 5 This column allows user to set how many times system rerry ping to PD For example if we set count 2 the meaning is that if system retry ping to the PD and the PD doesn t response continuously the PoE port will be reset e Action Allows user to set which action will be apply if the PD witout any response WGSD 10020HP offers 3 actions as following gt PD Reboot It menas system will reset the PoE port that connected the PD gt Reboot amp Alarm It means system will reset the PoE port and issue an alarm message via Syslog SMTP gt Alarm It means system will issue an alarm message via Syslog SMTP 315 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Reboot Time 30 180s This column allows user to set the PoE device rebooting time due to there are so many kind of PoE device on the market and theyhave different rebooting time The PD Alive check is not a defining standard so the PoE device on the market doesn t report reboots done information to WGSD 10020HP so user has to make sure how long the PD will be finished to boot and then set the time value to this column System is going to check the PD again according to the reboot time If ou can not make sure precisely b
335. meter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All e Link Type Allow 802 1Q Untagged or Tagged VLAN for selected port When adding a VLAN to selected port it tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress Untag outgoing frames without VLAN Tagged 114 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Tagged outgoing frames with VLAN Tagged e Q in Q Mode Sets the Managed Switch to QinQ mode and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured The default is for the Managed Switch to function in Disable mode Disable The port operates in its normal VLAN mode This is the default MAN Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for an uplink port to another device within the service provider network Customer Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for a client access port to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network Set Out layer VLAN tag The Tag Protocol Identifier TPID specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on ether type a tunnel access port 802 1Q Tag 8100 vMAN Tag 88A8 Default 802 1Q Tag The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 1
336. miasan a A A 465 POE Mode ccoo A iii da 465 AFAT MOJE hei irinaren ra neea lentas 466 POEs PTO ereer Mick oben e ee aaa a e e a E Eaa a a e e E dad e E EE 466 PoE Mamagement Modernie eiir e tada 467 PoE Maximum POWE ka n a R A a E A E AEE Ea 467 PoEAllocated POWet cited alates REDE eaa aa oa A i 467 POE PoWer SUPPLY AERE ETET TE E S A E E T 468 PoE Status v2 4 ieee A A oe ee ee ee eee 468 6 15 Thermal ComM An a aaae e aeaa r e de ae e aaae e aeea eE e oai e aaaea aeaa 469 Thermal Priority Temperature a 469 Thermal Port Priority ici a t 469 Thermal Statt Ssi iite Setee devtdcceeteg acid dl 470 TEMO E 471 6 16 LED PoWer Command aa aa iaa 471 LED Power TiME SA E a ae 471 LED Power Delete Time ts iii ia 471 LED Power Maintenance civismo dore 472 PED Power ConfOQuratio mi asa ni rai O 472 6 17 Quality of Service Command commmcinnccnccccnnncnn rc 473 QOS Configuration da 473 Qos Port Classification Class 2 ucn n inane ai 473 QoS Port Classification DPL isisi io 474 QoS Port Classification POP sissssecsssgccsvsestpeevsace cet batt a a nant sbuaueddeaaandiegeevneed 474 QoS Port ClassificatiOn DEN a a A 475 QoS Port Classification Tag E E eees dain A E N A v a iiaia 475 QoS Port Classification Macia dc 476 QoS Port Classification DSCP rii geii tiii aio 476 QoS Port POliGer Mode T ETTA AE E T EE 477 Q0S Port Policer Rate ccn ieee ie E nei sh N RIRE 477 QoS Port Policer Unit sasin mirr Aaa bats A in Aad eats ALA tees 478
337. mmunity VLANs Enable disable port isolation on port Configures the MAC based VLAN entries Displaies MAC based VLAN entries Configures the protocol based VLAN entries Displaies the protocol based VLAN entries 107 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 6 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a co
338. mnnnnniniananaaaa rana 522 VCL MAG bas d VLAN Delet iii a A aa a 522 AAH ERST Fe SD PEA AAN AAA EEEE e EAE SA DOAA EES A E AE A 523 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Ethernet Il oooccccccccnonnccncnnccnononoconnonononnonoronnonononnnnnronnnncnonnnnnnrnnenancnnnannranenos 523 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add SNAP u cccccccccccccccceccceceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeseseceseseeeseseseseseseeeseseseseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeess 523 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add LLG iii E E AA a E TNE a ie 524 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Ethernet Il oooccccononnccninncocononoconnnncnnononoconnoncnonnonncnnnoncnonnnonoranennnnononnnrananos 524 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete SNAP ccccccccccccsseseececeeeceeneseeeececeseaneeeeeeceeeseaaeeeeeeeseeaueaseseeeeseeaeeaeeeeeeseeas 524 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete LLC ooococcccoconoccnonoconononoconcnncncnnonoconnononcnnonnrnnnonononnonnrrnnoncnonnnanrrnnenanonnnannrnnanos 525 VCL Protocol based VLAN Addr runes iia 525 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete o ooocccccnccccconococcnnconononoconcnncnnnnonornnnonononnonnrnnnnnnnonnnnnrrnnancnnnnnnnnrnnenancnnnanerananos 525 VCL Protocol based VLAN ConfiguratiON ooononcccnnnoccconococnnononcnonanennnnnnnn ttti unut nn nana rn ran n nn rn rnr rra 526 7 SWITCH OPERATION ccoo 527 7A Address Tale iii aii iii ai idad iii 527 Te A A 527 7 3 Forwarding 8 Filtering ccccesecccsseeeeeeneeeeeeen sense en neee eee neeeee en neeeeeegeeeeeegseeee
339. mple Enable port limit for port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network limit port 1 enable Security Network Limit Limit Description Set or show the max number of MAC addresses that can be learned on this set of ports Syntax Security Network Limit Limit lt port_list gt lt limit gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt limit gt Max number of MAC addresses on this port default Show current limit Default Setting 4 Example Set limit in 5 WGSD 10020HP gt security network limit limit 1 10 5 Security Network Limit Action Description Set or show the action involved with exceeding the limit 398 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Syntax Security Network Limit Action lt port_list gt none trap shut trap_shut Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports none trap shut trap_shut Action to be taken in case the number of MAC addresses exceeds the limit none Don t do anything trap Send an SNMP trap shut Shutdown the port trap_shut Send an SNMP trap and shutdown the port default Show current action Default Setting none Example Set trap mode for limit action for port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network limit action 1 trap Security Network Limit Reopen Description Reopen one or more ports whose limit is exceeded and shut down Syntax Security Network Limit Reopen lt port_li
340. munities screen in Figure 4 3 4 appears SNMPv3 Communities Configuration public private Figure 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The 82 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask Buttons _ Add new coramunity Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 4 2 SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name The SNMPv3 Users screen in Figure 4 3 5 appears SNMPv3 Users Configuration Delete User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password 800007e50171000001 default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None Figure 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Users Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Engine I
341. munity Write Community SNMP System Configuration Figure 4 3 1 SNMP System Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation e Version Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 e Read Community Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string will associated with SNMPv3 communities table e Write Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string will associated with SNMPv3 communities table 79 e Engine ID User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not a
342. n Show MAC address table configuration Syntax MAC Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show Mac address state User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Description 345 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Add MAC address table entry Syntax MAC Add lt mac_addr gt lt port_list gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt port_list gt Port list or all or none lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Add Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in port1 and vid1 WGSD 10020HP gt mac add 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 1 MAC Delete Description Delete MAC address entry Syntax MAC Delete lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Delete Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in vid1 WGSD 10020HP gt mac delete 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 MAC Lookup Description Lookup MAC address entry Syntax MAC Lookup lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt 346 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Lookup state of Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 WGSD 10020HP gt mac lookup 00 30 4f 01 01 02 MAC Age Time Description Set or show the MAC address age timer S
343. n default Show port isolation port list Default Setting disable Example Enable isolate for port10 WGSD 10020HP gt pvlan isolate 10 enable 362 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 7 Security Command Security Switch User Configuration Description Show users configuration Syntax Security Switch Users Configuration Default Setting User Name Privilege admin 15 Example Show users configuration WGSD 10020HP gt security switch user configuration Users Configuration Security Switch User Add Description Add or modify users entry Syntax Security Switch Users Add lt user_name gt lt password gt lt privilege_level gt Parameters lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores lt password gt The password for this user name The allowed string length is 0 32 Use clear or as null string lt privilege_level gt User privilege level 1 15 363 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Add new user username test password test amp privilege 10 WGSD 10020HP gt security switch users add test test 10 Security Switch User Delete Description Delete users entry Syntax Security Switch Users Delete lt user_name gt Parameters lt user_names gt A string identifyin
344. n DUT and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network Buttons Save Click to save changes 50 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew a Renew Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration The screen in Figure 4 2 3 appears IPv6 Configuration TO artigo Auto Configuration O 192 168 0 100 Link Local Address feB80 230 4fff fe24 4d1 VLAN ID The page includes the following fields Object Figure 4 2 3 Pv6 Configuration page screenshot Description e Auto Configuration Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer e Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of re
345. n Delete lt port_list gt lt group_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 525 lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Configuration Description Show VCL protocol based VLAN entries Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Conf 526 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 7 SWITCH OPERATION 7 1 Address Table The Switch is implemented with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch 7 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 7 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Ethernet Switching will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet
346. n Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any e SNAP PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within 0x00 0xF FFF or Any default value is Any e IPv4 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y Z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF 11 AF43 IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option yes no jany Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP IPv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicabl
347. n of the MAC address age time and the learning mode per port When loading this file only the included parameters will be changed This means that the age time will be set to 200 and the learn mode will be set to automatic Save Configuration 1 Press the Save Configuration button to save the current configuration in manager workstation The following screens in Figure 4 2 24 amp 4 2 25 appear File Download Do you want to open or save this file Name ntent length_18058Server__PLANET_Web_Server Type XML Document 17 6KB From 192 168 0 100 harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or 2 While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially Y save this file What s the risk Figure 4 2 24 File Download screen 73 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 2 Chose the file save path in management workstation Save As O Config Backup My Recent Documents Ls My Documents File name eontig xml My Network Save as type All Files Figure 4 2 25 File save screen 4 2 20 Configuration Upload This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Upload screen in Figure 4 2 26 appears Configuration Upload Browse ited Figure 4 2 26 Configuration Upload page screenshot Configuration Upload 1 Click the tome configurati
348. n seconds before a MAC address that failed authentication gets a new authentication chance Syntax Security Network NAS Holdtime lt hold_time gt Parameters lt hold_time gt Hold time before MAC addresses that failed authentication expire default Show current hold time Default Setting 10 Example Set NAS hold time in 100sec WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas holdtime 100 Security Network NAS RADIUS QoS Description Set or show either global enabledness use the global keyword or per port enabledness of RADIUS assigned QoS Syntax 404 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned QoS setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned QoS setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned QoS enabledness enable Enable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned QoS enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS RADIUS QoS WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas radius_qos enable Security Network NAS RADIUS VLAN Description Set or show either global enabledness use the global keyword or per port enabledness of RADIUS assigned VLAN Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN global lt port_list gt
349. n table Syntax VLAN Forbidden Add lt vid gt lt name gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Frobidden add port1 to port4 in VLAN10 WGSD 10020HP gt vlan forbidden add 10 1 4 VLAN Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Delete lt vid gt lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name Example Delete VLAN10 WGSD 10020HP gt vlan delete 10 355 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series VLAN Forbidden Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax LAN Forbidden Delete lt vid gt lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name Example Forbidden delete VLAN10 WGSD 10020HP gt vlan forbidden delete 10 VLAN Forbidden Lookup Description Lookup VLAN Forbidden port entry Syntax VLAN Forbidden Lookup lt vid gt name lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs name VLAN name string lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet VLAN Lookup Description Lookup VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Lookup lt vid gt name lt name gt combined static nas mvr voice_vian all Parameters 356 User s Manual of WGSD 10020
350. n the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Hi Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default M Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermedi
351. nP Mode Description Set or show the UPnP mode Syntax UPnP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable UPnP disable Disable UPnP default Show UPnP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the UPnP mode 498 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt upnp mode enable UPnP TTL Description Set or show the TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages Syntax UPnP TTL sttl gt Parameters lt ttl gt ttl range 1 255 default Show UPnP TTL Default Setting 4 Example Set the value 10 for TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages WGSD 10020HP gt upnp ttl 10 UPnP Advertising Duration Description Set or show UPnP Advertising Duration Syntax UPnP Advertising Duration lt duration gt Parameters lt duration gt duration range 100 86400 default Show UPnP duration range Default Setting 100 Example Set value 1000 for UPnP Advertising Duration WGSD 10020HP gt upnp advertising duration 1000 499 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 22 MVR Command MVR Configuration Description Show the MVR configuration Syntax MVR Configuration Example Show the MVR configuration WGSD 10020HP gt mvr configuration MVR Configuration MVR Mode Disabled Muticast VLAN ID 100 Port Port Mode Port Type Immediate Leave Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Dis
352. nd errors error Send errors Default Setting info Example To set log level WGSD 10020HP gt log level warning System Timezone Description Set or show the system timezone offset Syntax System Timezone lt offset gt 326 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt offset gt Time zone offset in minutes 720 to 720 relative to UTC Default Setting 0 Example To set timezone WGSD 10020HP gt system timezone 0 System Log Lookup Description Show or clear the system log Syntax System Log Lookup lt log_id gt alllinfolwarninglerror clear Parameters lt log_id gt System log ID or range default All entries all Show all levels default info Show informations warning Show warnings error Show errors clear Clear log Example To show system log WGSD 10020HP gt system log lookup Number of entries Level Time Message 327 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 1 Info Switch just made a cold boot 2 Info 1970 01 01T00 00 05 00 00 Link up on port 8 WGSD 10020HP gt System Reboot Description Reboot the system Syntax System Reboot Example To reboot device without changing any of the settings WGSD 10020HP gt system reboot System Restore Default Description Restore factory default configuration Syntax System Restore Default keep_ip Parameters keep_ip Keep IP configuration default
353. nd thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s 175 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 9 2 Port Policing This page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports The Port Policing screen in Figure 4 9 1 appears QoS Ingress Port Policers 500 kbps vw 500 kbps 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 Figure 4 9 1 QoS Ingress Port Policers page screenshot aaa OOOOO0O00000 2 3 4 5 6 l 8 9 O _ The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Enable Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port e Rate Controls the rate for the policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Rate Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 15000 when the Policer Unit is Mbps or kfps e Unit Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps Mbps fps or kfps The default value is kbps Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 176 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 9 3 Port Classification This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports The Port Classifica
354. neighbor device information Syntax LLDPMED Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 462 6 13 EEE Command EEE Configuration Description Show eee configuration Syntax EEE Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show EEE configuration of port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt eee configuration 1 4 EEE Configuration Port Mode Urgent queues Disabled none Disabled none Disabled none Disabled none EEE Mode Description Set or show the eee mode Syntax EEE Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable EEE 463 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series disable Disable EEE default Show eee mode Default Setting Disabled Example Enable EEE mode for port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt eee mode enable 1 4 EEE Urgent Queues Description Set or show EEE Urgent queues Syntax EEE Urgent_queues lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt List of queues to configure as urgent queues 1 8 or none Default Setting none 464 6 14 Power over Ethernet Command PoE Configuration Description Show PoE configuration Syntax PoE Conf
355. net RJ 45 with IEEE 802 3af 802 3at PoE Injector M 2 100 1000Base X SFP slots M RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup gt Layer 2 Features Prevents packet loss with back pressure Half Duplex and IEEE 802 3x PAUSE frame flow control Full Duplex High performance of Store and Forward architecture and runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth Storm Control support Broadcast Multicast Unknown Unicast Support VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Up to 255 VLANs groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Private VLAN Edge PVE Protocol based VLAN MAC based VLAN Voice VLAN Support Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol spanning tree by VLAN BPDU Guard Support Link Aggregation 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel Static Trunk Maximum 5 trunk groups up to 10 ports per trunk group Up to 20Gbps bandwidth Duplex Mode Provide Port Mirror many to 1 Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port 23 gt Quality of Service Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control 8 priority queues on all switch ports Traffic classification IEEE 802 1p CoS TOS DSCP IP Precedence of IPv4 IPv6 packet
356. network ip source guard port mode 1 4 enable Security Network IP Source Guard Limit Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port limitation for dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard limit lt port_list gt lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited dynamic entry limit 0 2 or unlimited Default Setting unlimited Example Set IP source guard limit WGSD 10020HP gt security network ip source guard 1 1 Security Network IP Source Guard Entry Description Add or delete IP source guard static entry Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_ip gt lt allowed_mac gt 420 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port IP source guard static entry delete Delete existing port IP source guard static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_ip gt IP address a b c d IP address allowed for doing IP source guard lt allowed_mac gt MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx MAC address allowed for doing IP source guard Example Add IP source guard static entry WGSD 10020HP gt security network ip source guard entry 1 add 1 192 168 0 20 Security Network IP Source Guard Status Description Show IP source guard static and d
357. nfigured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features m Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard a Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs E End stations can belong to multiple VLANs E Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices E Priority tagging M EEE 802 10 Standard IEEE 802 10 tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging m The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers m The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Some relevant terms Tagging The act of pu
358. nfrastructure speedily To fulfill the demand PLANET releases the IPv6 management Gigabit Ethernet Switch WGSD series Managed Switch It supports both IPv4 and IPv6 management functions It can work with original network structure IPv4 and also support the new network structure IPv6 in the future With easy and friendly management interfaces and plenty of management functions included the WGSD series Managed Switch is the best choice for ISP to build the IPv6 FTTx edge service and for SMB to connect with IPv6 network 20 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series High Performance Cost effective Gigabit solution for backbone of SMB The PLANET WGSD 10020 series is the Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Switch which can handle extremely large amounts of data in a secure topology linking to an Enterprise backbone or high capacity network server with 20Gbps switching fabric The powerful features of QoS and network security make WGSD 10020 series Switch to offer effective data traffic control for ISPs and Enterprises such as VoIP video streaming and multicast applications It is ideal for the core layer of campus enterprise networks and the aggregation layer of IP metropolitan networks High Performance The WGSD 10020 series provides 8 10 100 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports 2 100 1000X SFP slots It boasts high performance architecture of switch that is capable for providing the non blocking switch fabric and wire speed throughput as high as 20Gbps whi
359. ng For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 6 1 e Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level 182 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 9 6 1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for a specific port are configured on this page The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking sscreen in Figure 4 9 8 appears Port 0 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 Figure 4 9 8 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Controls the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level e PCP DEI Configuration Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default e QoS class DP level Controls the mapping of the classified QoS class DP level to PCP DEI values to PCP DEI Mapping when the mode is set to Mapped Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Cancel Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page 4 9 7 Port DSCP This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all
360. ng state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign roo
361. nnections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provides directory service and security features ToS is an acronym for Type of Service It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control It is fully decoded to determine the priority from t
362. nnectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears 300 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series ICMP Ping O Ping Size a Figure 4 15 1 ICMP Ping page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you had setup the correct gateway IP address Buttons Start Click to transmit ICMP packets 4 15 2 IPv6 Ping This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4 15 2 appears ICMPv6 Ping 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 15 2 ICMPv6 Ping page screenshot The page includes the following fields 301 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Object Description e IPv6 Address The
363. nsceiver ccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeae cece ee eeeeaaece cece seca eeaaeaeeeeeeeseceaaaeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeseeseceeeeeseseeeaes 35 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT isis RANA REO 38 A A AA secddeescerecteaececcbcaceeeshe sdezccucdeateubececeneube ddcuccuedeadeabeseoevducdeecepbeadeuedcdversscdeevenses 38 3 2 Management ACCESS OvervieW ninia 39 3 3 Administration Console iii 39 3 4 Web Management c ecccceseeeeeensneeeeensneeeeensneeeeensneeeeenseeeeeensneeeeensaneeeeensueeaesnseeeeeensneeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeenaes 41 3 5 SNMP Based Network Manageme nt s cccssccssseeceeeeeeeneeesnaeenseeeeeaesesaaeenseaeeeeeeesnaesaseeeenseaeseaeseseaeseneeeeees 42 4 WEB CONFIGURATION corran diana ROA AAA AAA 43 AL Main Web Page ci dale ilac s 46 A E 48 4 2 1 System Informations seep Da aia 49 4 2 2 1P GonfigUr ti iii id e A tias 50 42 3 IPVO ConfigUraliON citada lalalala 51 4 2 4 UsSers CONQUE usan ica rod tet Aiea E ode E dai deidad DO E adonde 52 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 422 5 Privilege Level iii tia 55 4 2 6 NIP CON UA 57 Ay DT NNR esta is ateos fer se sra a le de la or se do cele a ole e a 2 58 PA AB aO m nE E AEA E E A EE A o da 59 4 2 9 DACP Relay Statistics ccna oe A ee i i A eed 61 42 40 CRU LOad once eect e eth eee oA earn nae Se AS ea A Ae are Ra a eRe 63 AS LOG eres scvetecvaccsdgceccvaus poeee sgeetevea peeve E T ageesubeateeeesucnweae ait beaonebalaebewssiges adele 64 4 2 12 Detailed OG ti iia AA acim Ae
364. nsition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other ports The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and AutoEdge fields This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor gt Spanning Tree gt STP Detailed Bridge Status e AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized e AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not e Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard e Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learn
365. nsumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen By default IE7 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection make sure the manager PC must be set on same the IP subnet address with the Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the SGSW Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Browser IP Address RJ 45 UTP Cable ENEE EY IP Adress 192 168 0 x Figure 4 1 1 Web Management 43 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series m Logging on the switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 7 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address as following http 192 168 0 100 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username passwor
366. nternet Information Services 115 Manager Y Windows Update 2 Licensing gt Manage Your Server gt Se Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration En Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards A Network Load Balancing Manager FE Performance gt a Remote Desktops gt a Routing and Remote Access gt By Services B Terminal Server Licensing Log Terminal Services Configuration start 3 8 O SP Terminal Services Manager id Computers Administrator i Windows Explorer Y Paint e HyperTerminal Ethereal an Accessories Internet Explor E Startup 8 Internet Explorer S Outlook Express r Remote Assistance fa Administrative Tools I IxChariot Ethereal All Programs we wh 9 13PM Figure 4 11 15 Windows 2003 AD server setting path 254 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 5 Enter Active Directory Users and Computers create legal user data the next right click a user what you created to enter properties and what to be noticed New Object User xi e Create in ca test pc Users First name test Initials Last name Full name test User logon name test ca test pe v User logon name pre Windows 2000 Figure 4 11 16 Add User Properties screen New Object User Create in ca test pcLlsers Password eseses Confirm password eseees User must change password at next logon
367. number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets e Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets e Rx and Tx Pause Account of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have Receive and Transmit Size Counters an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Description Object e Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion e Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors e Rx Undersize The number of short frames received with valid CRC e Rx Oversize The number of long frames received with valid CRC e Rx Fragments The number of short frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Jabber The number of long frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port 1 Short frames are frames that are smaller t
368. o previously saved values 310 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 16 4 PoE Status This page allows the user to inspect the total power consumption total power reserved and current status for all PoE ports The screen in Figure 4 16 4 appears Power Over Ethernet Status Current Power Consumption 0 150 W Total Power Reserved 0 0 150 W Temperature 37 C 99 F Local Port PD Class Power Used W Current Used mA Priority Port Status Critical PoE OFF Critical PoE OFF Critical PoE OFF Critical PoE OFF Critical PoE OFF Critical PoE OFF Critical PoE OFF 8 Critical PoE OFF Total Auto Refresh O Figure 4 16 4 PoE Status screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description Current Power Show the total watts usage of PoE Switch Consumption Total Power Reserved Shows how much the total power be reserved for all PDs e Temperature Display the current operating temperature of PoE chip unit e Local Port This is the logical port number for this row e PD Class Display the class of the PD attached to the port as established by the classification process Class 0 is the default for PDs The PD is powered based on PoE Class level if system working on Classification mode A PD shall return Class 0 to 4 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4 16 1 e Power Used W The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using
369. o refresh the page immediately Refresh _ clear J Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 173 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 8 16 MVR Groups Information Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR Group Table The MVR Groups Information screen in Figure 4 8 19 appears MVR Groups Information Auto refresh O Start from VLAN 1 add group address 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port Members an vian 10 roo 2 a e 5 s a o 10 Nomoreenties No more entries Figure 4 8 19 MVR Groups Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately e Updates the table starting with the first ent
370. of WGSD 10020 Series 4 7 Spanning Tree Protocol 4 7 1 Theory The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions E STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D E RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w a MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the con
371. of WGSD 10020 Series IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration for Switch 1 Filtering Groups Add new Filtering Group Figure 4 8 7 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered Buttons Add new Filtering Group Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Status This page provides IGMP Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 8 appears 161 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series IGMP Snooping Status Statistics Status h 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 The page includes the following fields Object Auto refresh C Figure 4 8 8 IGMP Snooping Status page screenshot Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Querier Transmit The number of Transmitted Querier e Querier Receive The number of Received Querier e V1 Reports Receive The nu
372. ols the port s authentication mode The following modes are available a Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication a Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access a Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the 225 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many inf
373. ompatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 2006 A1 2007 Class A EN 61000 3 2 2006 A 1 2009 A 2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 2010 TEC 61000 4 2 2008 TEC 61000 4 3 2006 A1 2007 A2 2010 TEC 61000 4 4 2004 A1 2010 TEC 61000 4 5 2005 IEC 61000 4 6 2008 IEC 61000 4 8 2009 IEC 61000 4 11 2004 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer O Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Ph 2 Taiwan 31 Oct 2011 Place Date Legal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528
374. on button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose saved 74 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Choose file Look in Config Backup My Recent Documents confio xmi Desktop My Documents is My Computer My Network File name config xml Places Files of type lan Files Cancel Figure 4 2 27 Windows file selection menu popup Upload 2 Select on the configuration file then click Ud the bottom of the browser shows the upload status 3 After down the main screen appears Transfer Completed 4 2 21 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the stack switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Figure 4 2 28 appears Factory Default Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Default Figure 4 2 28 Factory Default page screenshot 75 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Yes Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration After the Factory button be pressed and rebooted the system will load the default IP settings as following Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 The other setting value is bac
375. on Delete access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Delete lt access_id gt Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 Example Delete access management ID 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security switch access delete 1 Security Switch Access Lookup Description Lookup access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Lookup lt access_id gt Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 Example Lookup access management entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch access lookup 1 Security Switch Access Clear Description Clear access management entry 374 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Syntax Security Switch Access Clear Example Clear access management entry WGSD 10020HP gt security switch access clear Security Switch Access Statistics Description Show or clear access management statistics Syntax Security Switch Access Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear access management statistics Example Show access management statistics WGSD 10020HP gt security switch access statistics Access Management Siatistics Receive Discard Discard Receive Discard 0 Receive 0 0 0 Receive Discard Receive 0 Discard Security Switch SNMP Configuration Description Show SNMP configuration Syntax Security Switch SNMP Configuration 375 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Switch SNMP Mod
376. on Matus dE 92 4 4 4 Port Statistics De talll ic posse ieeccentsha iaa 92 4 4 5 SFP Iniormation s 2sc A eae a a eae ee ee ee ie 95 A A OSPOrt E O 96 45 LINK AGGre AAA tee seeds nck cet tes aea decade nates elses edacencuueeaesaeedauceceutedeecestaceeeccetauace 99 ADT Static Aggregation iii even eae eh tive eye eee ee 101 4 5 2 LACP Configuration risina esse hates A ries 103 45 3 LACP SYStOM Status cito auboatywaunt eenstuesh aut pbeeeusucs Ea AAE eana eaaa A ani Eiana 104 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 5 4 LACP Port Status tds 105 4 5 5 LAGP Port Statistics coc ia ht e te cee es eat a e e e 106 46 VLAN ii dc 107 4 6 1 VLAN OvervieW conil ii ida iba dei 107 4 6 2 IEEE 802 1O VLAN wee ee a eee a eres See 108 4 6 3 VLAN Basic Information iii i en i a en ee eine 111 4 6 4 VLAN Port Configuration iii ad posa 112 4 65 VLAN M MbErsM ps cvsecscsecccscus enient naana aeea aaan sues svbeatpeeeskobeensaitpeesuuceeasoteecmsuetess 116 4 6 0 VLAN Membership Status cia tr 117 4 6 7 VLAN Port Status cn dd ii 119 4 6 8 Private VIAN o o a ont 120 4 6 9 Port Isola iii aa OE 121 4 6 10 VLAN Setting example aaa 123 4 6 10 1 Two separate 802 10 VLAN ii ad aes 123 4 6 10 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware SWitCh oooononcccnnnocccnnocccccononcnnnnanccnn nn n nn nano cnn rnnnn nr cane rra 126 4 6 10 3 Port lsolate cuina ira a 128 4 6 111 MAC based VEAN Suda doo Sg moto a e do a ed oe a a a e a Be 130 4 6 12 MAC based VLAN Stat
377. on mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames e PCP DEI to QoS Controls the mapping of the classified PCP DEI to QoS class DP level values class DP level when Tag Classification is set to Enabled Mapping Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page 4 9 4 Port Scheduler This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports The Port Scheduler screen in Figure 4 9 4 appears QoS Egress Port Schedulers mode _ ao e2 92 03 04 05 Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority l ICO 100 PA 0 10 E 110 ho J Figure 4 9 4 QoS Egress Port Schedule page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers 179 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 5 1 e Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port e Q0 Q5 Shows the weight for this queue and port 4 9 5 Port Shaping This page provides an ov
378. on of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Contact MDI Media Dependant Interface MDI X Media Dependant Interface Cross 1 Tx transmit Tx transmit jae ll a Tx transmit Tx transmit ee A User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable SIDE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown SIDE 2 8 Brown Crossover Cable SIDE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown SIDE 2 8 Brown SIDE2 1
379. on sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol Th
380. onfiguration miin a e a das 330 IPDS AEE EE AEE A AET 330 IP Seip i AAA ed i ee E ee 331 IPPO a a eee ae aah ee tee td Ae ee a He at e e aa ed ea aa 332 A PA E E haa tide E E 332 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series ANS AA halen eeceeig vee E tie eaaa yale stan aaa Laa Ea Ee deedesguesdubdedey Ta Ea Saata aae iT iNi 333 IPVO AW TO CIN G cto ce ch cres eno te See e E AS 333 IPVO Selina 334 TVG Edi aTe AE AEA EEEE ENTE EEA R TAE EAE N E E E ETE E EEE 335 IPNTP CONQUE 0 00 ici 335 IPNTP Mode a e ad al e e oe 336 PNTE Server Add irienner notice 336 IP NEP Server IPVG AGG ia cc eoa e A 337 IP NTP Server Deletes miniak osat e a a a aaa EE a E E E N Eak 337 6 3 Port Management COMMANd nccnnciinnnnnnnonnnn cc 339 Port CONTIGUA drid 339 Port Mode nevar DR 339 Port Plow Goa aa 340 Port State nea ee ei ee A i He ee ee ee eels 341 Port Maximum Frame ista 341 Port PoWeriianijaricaada aaa abetos 342 PorbEXCesSSIVO ii A in adas 342 E A a i e AN 343 Pot Venvir et E ei o A e e ee ea 343 A Re isaac ko hn SN a A 8 hae Ne a ad hdc oan Hla Ad Ande Bante Gane 344 6 4 MAC Address Table Command cccceecceeceeeeeeeesneeeneneeseaeeeseeeenseeeesaesasaaeenseeeeeaeeescaesaseeeenseaeseeeseesenenenees 345 MAC CONTIgUratiON csi tai doit 345 MAC ACG ive ido tev ies oo ree tite ata do ciao ato denle do ld to end a da IB ea en See aL tdo 345 MAG Delete iii aa 346 MAC LOU tibrdaid 346 MAC Age TIME iriste ienien a apli 347 MAG Leaning EA E A das
381. onfigured RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server e Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch 241 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server e Secret The secret up to 29 charac
382. onfigured for the device only limited by the quantity of ports on the device To configure a proper traffic distribution the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed 100 4 5 1 Static Aggregation User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group The aggregation hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Hash Code Contributors The Static Aggeration screen in Figure 4 5 2 appears Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number Figure 4 5 2 Aggregation Mode Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled e Destination MAC The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for Address the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled e IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Addres
383. oot Reset Button gt 5 seconds Factory Default Dimension W x D x H 330 x 155 x 43 5 mm 1U high 1 4kg 1 8kg Power FAN Alert Link Act per Gigabit port PoE In Use for port 1 8 Max 12 8 watts Max 172 9 watts Power Consumption 43 65 BTU 589 6 BTU Power Requirement AC AC 100 240V 50 60Hz Power over Ethernet Power Link Act and speed per Gigabit port PoE Standard IEEE 802 3af at PoE PSE End Span Per Port 56V DC Max 30 8 watts Power Pin Assignment 1 2 3 6 PoE Power Budget a 180 Watts PoE Power Supply Type PoE Power Output Number of PD 7Watts Number of PD O 15 4Watts Number of PD O 30 8Watts POE Ability Layer 2 Function Basic Management Interfaces Console Telnet Web Browser SNMPv1 v2c 26 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Secure Management Interface SSH SSL SNMP v3 Port disable enable Auto negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Port configuration Flow Control disable enable Bandwidth control on each port Power saving mode control Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control status Auto negotiation status trunk status Many to 1 monitor 802 1Q Tagged Based VLAN up to 256 VLAN groups Q in Q tunneling Private VLAN Edge PVE MAC based VLAN VLAN Protocol based VLAN Voice VLAN MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Up to 256 VLAN groups out of 4096 VLAN IDs IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk L
384. ooting time we suggest you to set it longer Buttons Save Click it to save changes Click it to reset configuration which doesn t to be saved yet 316 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 5 1 Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Logon to the Console Once the terminal has connected to the device power on the Managed Switch the terminal will display that it is running testing procedures Then the following message asks the login username amp password The factory default password as following and the login screen in Figure 5 1 appears Username admin Password admin COM1 115200band Tera Term YT File Edit Setup Control Window Resize Help KA RAM Ox80000000 0x88000000 Ox80020e78 O0x87fe1G00 available FLASH x4Q000000 0x407ffffF 128 x Ux10000 blocks Executing boot script in 3 008 seconds enter C to abort gt fis load d mana d Image loaded from Ox 80240000 0x827c09a8 go Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers WGSD 10020HP 21 41 6l 8l
385. or COMMON iS 493 Mirror COUTO edad 493 Mirror Pd iia 493 Mirror MOG uscar A na 494 6 19 Configuration Command cocmicinnnnnnnnnnnccnnr cc 495 Configuratidn SAV CG src inna er a tao aa drid Pros lcd 495 Configuration LOad sc 22 ri A a a a aaa 495 6 20 Firmware CAMA ii ada 496 ES A ON 496 Firmware IPV Oa 0 aia 496 Firmware l formati n iii Ai opa 496 EA A TR 496 6 21 UPNP Command aiii szcccecuecescdciseieedtece sacs ade bes deacesdeeeagsivsssate couauesoiasstevesacuscucdedsedeuuduececeteas 498 UPNP ConfiQurations 222 3 ccccc a aa E a aE a e a a ea e a ae e E AAE EE EE e AE E 498 16 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WPRP MOG iii ita 498 UPAP Tee te o e e o E e ES 499 UPP Advertising DUFAION ivan oda 499 6 22 MVR COM MAA a 500 MVR Contigua ATTE 500 VIV ROTO dd ee ed 500 MURO e do e o 501 MVR Modest tonada eden ais 501 MVR PO MOG Gy oe oo 2 coto des ot a ett acaso andino sha adan dl Ube e and a o dl edo a ad old 501 MVR Multicast VLAN iii ae 502 MVR Port Type atole ies 502 MVR Immediate LO ave iesenii ein eia Re 503 6 23 Voice VLAN COMMANdA co ccoo ii dt dass 504 Voice VLAN Configuration ceset apraiar tl ri qee les s 504 Voice VIAN Mode kiiri u a e ii 505 Voice VLAN Dio A 506 Voice VLAN Agetime iii ein 506 Voice VLAN Trafic Class iria in ii 507 VOICE VLAN OWA 280 iBall ES Eee ata a aE A eee a AS Ate ale 507 Voice VLAN OUI Delete ccnce ni eta at 508 Voice VEAN QUI Clero a tii ees adicci n 508 Voice VLAN
386. or SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are None None privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add new user Click to add a new user entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 84 4 3 4 3 SNMPv3 Groups User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name The SNMPv3 Groups screen in Figure 4 3 6 appears The page includes the following fields SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Object public default_ro_group private default_rw_group public default_ro_group private default_rw_group default_user default rw_group Ae Figure 4 3 6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration page screenshot Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are v1 Reserved fo
387. or gt VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the su
388. or some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both PPPoE is an acronym for Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet It is a network protocol for encapsulating Point to Point Protocol PPP frames inside Ethernet frames It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver modem over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks Wikipedia In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID 548 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Th
389. ormation exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate a Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port fo
390. ormation screen in Figure 4 3 3 appears System Information Configuration System Name O WaSD Tena The page includes the following fields Ge e Figure 4 3 3 System Information Configuration page screenshot E Object Description 81 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Configuration 4 3 4 1 SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page The entry index key is Community The SNMPv3 Com
391. ort QueueShaper Mode lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 enable Enable port queue shaper disable Disable port queue shaper 479 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series default Show port queue shaper mode Default Setting disable Example Enable port queue shaper for all port amp queue WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port QueueShaper Mode 1 10 0 7 enable QoS Port QueueShaper Rate Description Set or show the port queue shaper rate Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Rate lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 lt bit_rate gt Rate in kilo bits per second 100 3300000 Default Setting 500kbps Example Set the port queue shaper rate in 1000 WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port QueueShaper rate 1 10 0 7 1000 QoS Port QueueShaper Excess Description Set or show the port queue excess bandwidth mode Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Excess lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt enable disable 480 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 enable Enable
392. ort from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter present on the other stack switch units but with no port members AVLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you 116 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs Buttons Add new ent Glick to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes y Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values i Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN ID input fields Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID KA gg Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 6 6 VLAN Membership Status This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4 6 4 appears VLAN Membership Status for Static User Static v Start from WLAN 1 o with 20 entries per page Port Members a vanji 1 VV VV VV Y Y Y Auto refresh CI Fig
393. ort_list gt clear eapol radius Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear statistics eapol Show EAPOL statistics radius Show Backend Server statistics default Show all statistics Example Show 802 1X statistics in port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas statistics 1 Port 1 EAPOL Siatistics Rx Total 0 Tx Total Rx Response ld 0 Tx Request ld Rx Response O Tx Request Rx Start Rx Logoff Rx Invalid Type Rx Invalid Length 407 Port 1 Backend Server Statistics Rx Access Challenges Tx Responses Rx Other Requests Rx Auth Successes Rx Auth Failures Security Network ACL Configuration Description Show ACL Configuration Syntax Security Network ACL Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Security Network ACL Action Description Set or show the ACL port default action Syntax User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network ACL Action lt port_list gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_copy gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of
394. ot send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enabled Enable remote syslog mode operation Disabled Disable remote syslog mode operation e Syslog Server IP Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name e Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are Info Send informations warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 66 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 2 14 LED Power Reduction The LEDs power consumption can be reduced by lowering the LEDs intensity LEDs intensity could for example be lowered during night time or they could be turn completely off It is possible to configure 24 different hours of the day at where the LEDs intensity should be set The LED Power Reduction screen in Figure 4 2 17 appears LED Power Reduction Configuration LED Intensity Timers Delete Intensity O 0000 v 20 vl Add Time Maintenance On time at link change O 10 Sec Re Figure 4 2 17 LED Power Reduction page screenshot E The page includes the following fiel
395. ot support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 4 11 2
396. otocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network Multicast Receiver Multicast 4 Switch Transmitter P A IPTV s Server Router Switch Switch Multicast Switch Receiver O Multicast y Receiver ay D Figure 4 8 1 Multicast Service 154 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series B Multicast Receiver Multicast Switch Transmitter A IPTV Server Router Switch C Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 2 Multicast flooding B Multicast Receiver Multicast IGMP Snooping Transmitter Switch A IPTV Server Router IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Switch Switch C I IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping multicast stream control 155 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Seri
397. otocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP Switch IDs 1 16 are used to uniquely identify the switches within a stack The Switch ID of each switch is shown on the display on the front of the switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functionality is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services 551 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create co
398. ow AC signal in addition to the 48 VDC operating voltage The returned AC signal amplitude is monitored by the PSE at the port terminals During normal operation the PD s relatively low impedance lowers the returned AC signal while a sudden disconnection of this PD will cause a surge to the full AC signal level and will indicate PD disconnection 533 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve problems If the Ethernet Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual M The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Ethernet Switch Hi Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status M Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port M Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the switch 2 Try another port on the Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while turn on power again Ml 100Base TX port link LED is lit bu
399. own as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802 11 wireless networks Wireless networks broadcast messages using radio so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired networks When introduced in 1999 WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional wired network Wikipedia WiFi is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802 11 network whether 802 11b 802 11a dual band etc The term is promulgated by the Wi Fi Alliance WPA is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access It was created in response to several serious weaknesses r
400. ows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring 96 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror screen in Figure 4 4 7 appears Mirror Configuration Disabled y Figure 4 4 7 Mirror Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port to mirror on Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port Disabled disables mirroring e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted or frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the mirror port For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only 97 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes
401. oyment from restrictions due to power outlet locations which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the 3 12 watts installation time High Power PoE Splitter High PoE Splitter split the PoE 56V DC over the Ethernet cable into 12 24V DC f power output It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power 12 25 Watts outlet locations which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time 4 16 2 Power Configuration In a power over Ethernet system operating power is applied from a power source PSU power supply unit over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices PDs which are connected to ports Under some conditions the total output power required by PDs can exceed the maximum available power provided by the PSU The system may a prior be planed with a PSU capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the PoE ports in the system In order to maintain the majority of ports active power management is implemented The PSU input power consumption is monitored by measuring voltage and current The input power consumption is equal to the system s aggregated power consumption The power management concept allows all ports to be active and activates additional ports as long as the aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at which additional PDs cannot be connected When this value is exceeded ports will be deactivated according
402. ple Office e Postal community Postal community name Example Leonia name e P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 e Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Object Description e Emergency Call Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN Service identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated
403. plication type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of O represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 e DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration applies e Policy ID The set of policies that shall apply for a given port The set of policies is selected by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies 290 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons _ Add new policy click to add new policy Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP MED Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 3 appears The columns hold the following information LLDP MED Neig
404. pme flooding igmp enable IPMC Leave Proxy Description Set or show the mode of IPMC Leave Proxy Syntax IPMC Leave Proxy mld igmp enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC Leave Proxy disable Disable IPMC Leave Proxy default Show global IPMC Leave Proxy mode 512 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP Leave Proxy WGSD 10020HP gt ipmc leave proxy igmp enable IPMC Proxy Description Set or show the mode of IPMC Proxy Syntax IPMC Proxy mld igmp enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC Proxy disable Disable IPMC Proxy default Show global IPMC Proxy mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP Proxy WGSD 10020HP gt ipmc proxy igmp enable IPMC State Description Set or show the IPMC snooping state for VLAN Syntax IPMC State mld igmp lt vid gt enable disable 513 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs enable Enable MLD snooping disable Disable MLD snooping Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP snooping state for VLAN 1 WGSD 10020HP gt ipmc state igmp 1 enable IPMC Querier Description Set or show
405. port e Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately clear J Clears the counters for all ports 91 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 4 3 Port Thermal Protection Status This page allows the user to inspect status information related to thermal protection The Port Thermal Protection Status screen in Figure 4 4 3 appears Thermal Protection Status Figure 4 4 3 Thermal Protection Status page screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Temperature The current temperature for logical port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately H H Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 4 4 Port Statistics Detail This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit The Port Statistics Detail screen in Figure 4 4 4 appears 92 Receive Total
406. port configuration 1 Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port Assign Port 8 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 at the VLAN Member configuration page Define a VLAN 1 as a Public Area that overlapping with both VLAN 2 members and VLAN 3 members Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to be the member of each VLAN which wants to be aggregated At this sample add Port 8 to be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member port The screen in Figure 4 6 12 appears 127 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Port Members AT rs peiste wanio vinnm iels MMMM O A A Figure 4 6 12 VLAN overlap port setting amp VLAN 1 The public area member assign 5 Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port and the Trunking port must be a Tagged port while egress The Port 8 configuration as the following screen in Figure 4 6 13 af OO amp A A O mom Figure 4 6 13 The configuration of VLAN Trunk port That is although the VLAN 2 members Port 1 to Port 3 and VLAN 3 members Port 4 to Port 6 also belongs to VLAN 1 But with different PVID settings packets form VLAN 2 or VLAN 3 is not able to access to the other VLAN 6 Repeat Step 1 to 5 setup the VLAN Trunk port at the partner switch and add more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk repeat Step 1 to 3 to assign the Trunk port to the VLANs 4 6 10 3 Port Isolate The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles isolate and promiscuous ports and the each PCs are not able to access each other PCs of
407. powered up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange information about the devices wakeup time using the LLDP protocol For maximizing the power saving the circuit isn t started at once transmit data are ready for a port but is instead queued until 3000 bytes of data are ready to be transmitted For not introducing a large delay in case that data less then 3000 bytes shall be transmitted data are always transmitted after 48 us giving a maximum latency of 48 us the wakeup time If desired it is possible to minimize the latency for specific frames by mapping the frames to a specific queue done with QOS and then mark the queue as an urgent queue When an urgent queue gets data to be transmitted the circuits will be powered up at once and the latency will be reduced to the wakeup time The EEE Power Reduction screen in Figure 4 2 18 appears EEE Configuration EEE Urgent Queues rece trond x 2134 3 5 7 o OOOOOO00O OOOO0000O OOOOO0O00O OOOOO0O00O OOOOOO00O OOOOOO00O OOOOOOO0O OOOOO0000 Figure 4 2 18 EEE Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical EEE port e EEE Enable Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port e EEE Urgent Queues Queues set will activate transmition of frames as soon as any data is available Otherwise the queue will postpone the transmsion until 3000 bytes are ready to
408. pplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled e Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized 230 Buttons e Restart Refresh Save Click to refresh the page Click to save changes User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not c
409. presenting multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 through 128 e Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 51 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Provide the IPv6 SNTP Server address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 4 User
410. private 377 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Set public value in SNMP write community WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp write community public Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP traps disable Disable SNMP traps default Show SNMP trap mode Default Setting disable Example Enable SNMP trap mode WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap mode enable Security Switch SNMP Trap Version Description Set or show the SNMP trap protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP trap version 378 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default Setting 1 Example Set SNMP trap version in version 2c WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap version 2c Security Switch SNMP Trap Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP traps Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP trap community Default Setting public Example Set private value for SNMP trap community WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap community private Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination Des
411. ptical connective ability and robust layer 2 features the description of these models as below WGSD 10020 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Ethernet Switch hers eerste 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps PoE Plus 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Ethernet Switch Terms of Managed Switch means the Switches mentioned titled in the cover page of this User s manual i e WGSD series Managed Switch 1 1 Packet Contents Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items Check the contents of your package for following parts M The Managed Switch x1 M User s Manual CD x1 M Quick Installation Guide x1 M Rack Mount Accessory Kit x1 M Power Cord x1 M RubberFeet X4 M RS 232 DB9 Male Console Cable x1 M SFP Dust Caps X2 If any of these are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately if possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them against to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair 1 2 Product Description Cost effective IPv6 Managed Gigabit Switch solution for SMB Nowadays lots of electronic products or mobile devices can browse the Internet which means the need of IP Address increases However the current IPv4 network infrastructure is not capable enough to provide IP Address to each single users Clients The situation forces the ISP to build up the IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 network i
412. ptions Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services
413. r LED power reduction QoS Quality of Service Mirror Port mirroring Config Load Save of configuration via TFTP Firmware Download of firmware via TFTP UPnP Universal Plug and Play MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Voice VLAN Specific VLAN for voice traffic IPMC MLD IGMP Snooping VLC VLAN Control List 6 1 System Command System Configuration Description 321 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Show system configuration Syntax System Configuration all lt port_list gt Parameters all Show all switch configuration default Show system configuration port Show switch port configuration lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example To display system information WGSD 10020HP gt System configuration System Contact System Name WGSD 10020HP System Location Timezone Offset 0 MAC Address 00 30 4F 10 02 00 System Time 1970 01 01T00 10 55 00 00 System Uptime 00 10 55 Software Version Beta1109061425 Software Date 2011 09 06 14 27 40 0800 Previous Restart Cold WGSD 10020HP gt System Log Configuration Description Show system log configuration Syntax System Log Configuration Example To display system log information WGSD 10020HP gt System log configuration System Log Configuration 322 System Log Server Mode Disabled System Log Server Address System Log Level Info WGSD 10020HP gt System Version Description
414. r SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add new group Save e Group Name Click to save changes A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Click to add a new group entry Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 85 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 3 4 4 SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 Views screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears SNMPv3 Views Configuration View Type OID Subtree DO default_view included Y asdney view save Reset Figure 4 3 7 SNMPv3 Views Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possib
415. r instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once 226 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series successfully authenticated a Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security b
416. r than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval e Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port 283 e Mode User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors e Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted e Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information tran
417. r the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authenticat
418. rameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Voice VLAN security mode disable Disable Voice VLAN security mode default Show flow Voice VLAN security mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the Voice VLAN port security mode for port 1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt voice vian security 1 4 enable 510 6 24 IPMC Command IPMC Configuration Description Show IPMC snooping configuration Syntax IPMC Configuration mld igmp Parameters mldligmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP IPMC Mode Description Set or show the IPMC snooping mode Syntax IPMC Mode mld igmp enable disable Parameters mldligmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC snooping disable Disable IPMC snooping default Show global IPMC snooping mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP snooping User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt ipmc mode igmp enable 511 IPMC Flooding Description Set or show the IPMC unregistered addresses flooding operation Syntax IPMC Flooding mld igmp enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC flooding disable Disable IPMC flooding default Show global IPMC flooding mode Default Setting enable Example Enable IGMP flooding User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt i
419. ration AAA Configuration Server Timeout 15 seconds Server Dead Time 300 seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration Mode IP Address Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration Disabled 424 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Mode IP Address Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Security AAA Timeout Description Set or show server timeout Syntax Security AAA Timeout lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt Server response timeout 3 3600 seconds default Show server timeout configuration Default Setting 15 Example Set 30sec for server timeout WGSD 10020HP gt security aaa timeout 30 Security AAA Deadtime Description 425 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Set or show server dead time Syntax Security AAA Deadtime lt dead_time gt Parameters lt dead_time gt Time that a server is considered dead if it doesn t answer a request 0 3600 seconds default Show server dead time configuration Default Setting 300 Example Set 1000sec for server dead time WGSD 10020HP gt security aaa deadtime 1000 Security AAA RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secre
420. ration Common Server Configuration 49 Figure 4 11 7 Authentication Server Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields 240 Port State User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series These setting are common for all of the Authentication Servers Object Description e Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead e Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been c
421. ration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them Wikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System lt allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central loc
422. rce Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All Guard Configuration configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled e Port Mode Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port e Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients can be learned on given ports This value can be 0 1 2 and unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 272 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table This page provides Static IP Source Guard Table The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 12 11 appears Static IP Source Guard Table Figure 4 12 11 Static IP Source Guard Table screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address Buttons Ada new entry Click to add a
423. re 4 7 13 MST1 MSTI Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields MSTx MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Buttons 150 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Ser Click to set MSTx configuration Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Lt Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 4 7 8 Port Status This page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Status screen in Figure 4 7 14 appears STP Port Status CIST Role CIST State Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding
424. re used Figure 2 shows the pair on pins 4 and 5 connected together and forming the positive supply and the pair on pins 7 and 8 connected and forming the negative supply In fact a late change to the spec allows either polarity to be used 529 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Figure 8 1 Power Supplied over the Spare Pins The data pairs are used Since Ethernet pairs are transformer coupled at each end it is possible to apply DC power to the center tap of the isolation transformer without upsetting the data transfer In this mode of operation the pair on pins 3 and 6 and the pair on pins 1 and 2 can be of either polarity POWER SOURCING POWERED DEVICE EQUIPMENT PSE PD Figure 8 2 Power Supplied over the Data Pins When to install PoE Consider the following scenarios e You re planning to install the latest VoIP Phone system to minimize cabling building costs when your company moves into new offices next month e The company staff has been clamoring for a wireless access point in the picnic area behind the building so they can work on their laptops through lunch but the cost of electrical power to the outside is not affordable e Management asks for IP Surveillance Cameras and business access systems throughout the facility but they would rather avoid another electrician s payment 530 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series References IEEE Std 802 3af 2003 Amendment to IEEE Std 802 3 2002 includ
425. reach use the Multi 802 1X variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality a MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called cl
426. ress of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Lk lt Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 8 7 IGMPv3 Information Entries in the IGMP SSM Information Table are shown on this page The IGMP SSM Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Diffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the 163 IGMP SSM Information Table User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The Start from VLAN and Group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SSM Information Table The IGMPv3 Information screen in Figure 4 8 10 appears IGMP SSM Information Start from VLAN 1 land Group 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page PCN more entries Cd No more entries Auto refresh C Figure 4 8 10 IGMP SSM Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displ
427. rk applications such as IP Cameras VoIP Phones and Wireless Networking can help enterprises improve productivity It minimizes wires that must be used to install the network for offering lower cost and less power failures IEEE802 3af also called Data Terminal equipment DTE power via Media dependent interface MDI is an international standard to define the transmission for power over Ethernet The 802 3af is delivering 48V power over RJ 45 wiring Besides 802 3af also define two types of source equipment Mid Span and End Span E Mid Span Mid Span device is placed between legacy switch and the powered device Mid Span is tap the unused wire pairs 4 5 and 7 8 to carry power the other four is for data transmit E End Span End Span device is direct connecting with power device End Span could also tap the wire 1 2 and 3 6 PoE System Architecture The specification of PoE typically requires two devices the Powered Source Equipment PSE and the Powered Device PD The PSE is either an End Span or a Mid Span while the PD is a PoE enabled terminal such as IP Phones Wireless LAN etc Power can be delivered over data pairs or spare pairs of standard CAT 5 cabling How Power is Transferred Through the Cable A standard CAT5 Ethernet cable has four twisted pairs but only two of these are used for 10BASE T and 100BASE T The specification allows two options for using these cables for power shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3 The spare pairs a
428. rmation mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy 415 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy replace keep drop Parameters replace Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information default Show DHCP relay information policy Default Setting replace Example Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it WGSD 10020HP gt security network dhcp relay information policy keep Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP relay statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear DHCP relay statistics Example Show DHCP relay statistics WGSD 10020HP gt security network dhcp relay statistics Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Description Show DHCP snooping configuration Syntax 416 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode enable disab
429. ront panel the reset button is designed for reboot the Managed Switch without turn off and on the power The following is the summary table of Reset button functions 29 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Reset Button Pressed and Released Function lt 5 sec System reboot Reboot the Managed Switch Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings as below gt 5 sec Factory Default Default Username admin Default Password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 2 1 2 LED Indications The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of port links data activity and system power helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed Figure 2 3 amp Figure 2 4 shows the LED indications of these Managed Switches WGSD 10020 LED indication A 1000 LNK ACT Y 10 100 INK ACT LE E E ES r o v O PwR 1 23 4 5 6 a RESET Figure 2 3 WGSD 10020 LED panel System E B Color Function PWR Green Lights to indicate that the Switch has power Per 10 100 1000Mbps port LED Function 1000 Lights to indicate the port is running in 1000Mbps speed and successfully established LNK ACT Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 10 100 Lights to indicate the port is running in 10 100Mbps speed and successfully established LNK ACT B
430. ronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device 549 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP Samba is a program running under UNIX like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows IBM OS 2 and other SMB client machines Samba uses the Server Message Block SMB protocol and Common Internet File System CIFS which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms including Linux most common Unix platforms OpenVMS and IBM OS 2 Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear
431. rough a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states a Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets a Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets a Forwarding the port is forwarding packets a Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization switch boot to blocking E From blocking to listening or to disabled a From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwar
432. roup2 444 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt aggr delete 2 Aggregation Lookup Description Lookup link aggregation Syntax Aggr Lookup lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID Aggregation Mode Description Set or show the link aggregation traffic distribution mode Syntax Aggr Mode smac dmac lip port enable disable Parameters smac Source MAC address dmac _ Destination MAC address ip Source and destination IP address port Source and destination UDP TCP port enable Enable field in traffic distribution disable Disable field in traffic distribution Default Setting SMAC Enabled DMAC Disabled IP Enabled Port Enabled Example Disable SMAC mode 445 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt Aggr mode smac disable 446 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 10 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Command LACP Configuration Description Show LACP configuration Syntax LACP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP configuration WGSD 10020HP gt lacp configuration Key Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active LACP Mode Description
433. rt BPDU Guard disable Disable port BPDU Guard Default disable Example Eisable BPDU guard on port1 WGSD 10020HP gt stp port bpduguard 1 enable STP Port Statistic Description Show STP port statistics Syntax STP Port Statistics lt port_list gt clear 440 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear the selected port statistics Example Show STP port statistics WGSD 10020HP gt sip port statistics Port Rx MSTP TxMSTP RxRSTP TxRSTP RxSTP TxSTP RxTCN Tx TCN Rxill Rx Unk STP Port Mcheck Description Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for ports Syntax STP Port Mcheck lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt stp port mcheck 1 STP MSTI Port Configuration Description Show the STP port instance configuration Syntax STP Msti Port Configuration lt msti gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 441 Default auto STP MSTI Port Cost Description Set or show the STP port instance path cost Syntax STP Msti Port Cost lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt path_cost gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridg
434. rts lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default DEI for an untagged frame in 1 for port WGSD 10020HP gt gos Port Classification dei 1 1 QoS Port Classification Tag Description User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Set or show if the classification is based on the PCP and DEI values in tagged frames Syntax QoS Port Classification Tag lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable tag classification disable Disable tag classification default Show tag classification mode Default Setting disable Example Enable QoS port classification Tag 475 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt q0s Port Classification tag 1 10 enable QoS Port Classification Map Description Set or show the port classification map This map is used when port classification tag is enabled and the purpose is to translate the Priority Code Point PCP and Drop Eligible Indicator DEI from a tagged frame to QoS class and DP level Syntax QoS Port Classification Map lt port_list gt lt pcp_list gt lt dei_list gt lt class gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp_list gt PCP list or all default All PCPs 0 7 lt dei_list gt DEI list or all default All DEIs 0 1 lt class gt QoS class 0 7 l
435. ry Tx Lease Unassigned Tx Lease Unknown Tx Lease Active Rx Discover Rx Offer Rx Request Rx Decline Rx ACK Rx NAK Rx Release Rx Inform Rx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active im p Auto refresh O Figure 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Port Statistics screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted 270 e Rx and Tx Release User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned The number of lease una
436. ry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 174 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 9 Quality of Service 4 9 1 Understand QOS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying traffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network
437. s IP TCP UDP port number Typical network application Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Supports QoS and In Out bandwidth control on each port Traffic policing policies on the switch port DSCP remarking gt Multicast Supports IGMP Snooping v1 v2 and v3 Supports MLD Snooping v1 and v2 Querier mode support IGMP Snooping port filtering MLD Snooping port filtering Multicast VLAN Registration MVR support gt Security IEEE 802 1x Port Based MAC Based network access authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with the RADIUS servers TACACS login users access authentication RADIUS TACACS users access authentication IP Based Access Control List ACL MAC Based Access Control List Source MAC IP address binding DHCP Snooping to filter un trusted DHCP messages User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks Auto DoS rule to defend DoS attack IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder gt Management Switch Management Interfaces Console Telnet Command Line Interface Web switch management SNMP v1 v2c and v3 switch management 24 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series SSH SSL secure access Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events IPv6 IP Address NTP DNS management Built in Trivial File Trans
438. s lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Port based 802 1X Authentication authorized Port access is allowed unauthorized Port access is not allowed single Single Host 802 1X Authentication multi Multiple Host 802 1X Authentication macbased Switch authenticates on behalf of the client default Show 802 1X state Default Setting none Example Show the port 1 security state 401 WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas state 1 Port Admin State Port State Force Authorized Globally Disabled Last Source User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network NAS Reauthentication Description Set or show Reauthentication enabledness Syntax Security Network NAS Reauthentication enable disable Parameters enable Enable reauthentication disable Disable reauthentication default Show current reauthentication mode Default Setting disable Example Enable reauthentication function WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas reauthentication enable Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod Description Set or show either global enabledness use the global keyword or per port enabledness of RADIUS assigned VLAN Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned VLAN setting 402 User s Manu
439. s or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled e TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Static Aggregation Group Configuration The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 3 appears 101 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Aggregation Group Configuration Port Members Port Members crown a 2 3 5 6 7 iol Normal 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 4 5 3 Aggregation Group Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port e Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 102 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 5 2 LACP Configuration Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different de
440. s ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file e IP Protocol Value When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value e IPTTL Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero lPv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Fragment Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is gre
441. s Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 4 appears Users Configuration Privilege Level admin 15 Add new user Figure 4 2 4 Users Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Username The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User e Privilege Level The privilgeg level for the user Buttons Add new user Click to add a new user 52 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Add Edit User This page configures a user add edit or delete user Add User User Settings Password Password again Privilige Level Figure 4 2 5 Add Edit User Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Username The name identifying the user e Password The password of the user e Privilege Level The privilgeg level for the user 2 el 3 Oo on des Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values i Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users Delete User Delete the current user
442. s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Set low priority for port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt poe priority 1 4 low PoE Mamagement Mode Description Show Set PoE management mode Syntax PoE Mgmt_mode mgt_class mgt_alloc mgt_consumption mgt_priority PoE Maximum Power Description Set or show PoE maximum power per port 0 30 8 with one digit Syntax PoE Maximum_Power lt port_list gt lt port_power gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt port_power gt PoE maiximum power for the port 0 30 8 Default Setting 30 8 Example Set maximum power in 10 watts for port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt poe maximum_power 1 4 10 PoE Allocated Power Description Set or show PoE maximum power allocated per port 0 30 8 with one digit 467 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Syntax PoE Alloc_Power lt port_list gt lt alloc_power gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt alloc_power gt PoE maiximum power allocated for the port 0 30 8 Default Setting 30 8 Example Set PoE maximum power allocated in 10 watts for port1 4 WGSD 10020HP gt poe alloc_power 1 4 10 PoE Power Supply Description Set or show the value of the power supply Syntax PoE Power_Supply lt supply_power gt Parameters lt supply_powers gt PoE power for a power supply Example Set 100 watts of power supply
443. s an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser This page provides an overview of the privilege levels Configure NTP on this page Configure UPnP on this page Configure DHCP Relay on this page This page provides statistics for DHCP relay This page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The switch system log information is provided here The switch system detailed log information is provided here Configure remote syslog on this page Configuration LED power reduction on this page Configuration energy efficient ethernet power reduction on this page Configure thermal protection on this page This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server You can save the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags You can load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Configuration active or alternate firmware on this page You can reset the configuration of the stack switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained You can restart the stack switch on this page After restart the stack switch will boot normally 48 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 2 1 System Information The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a
444. s overview for all LLDP PoE neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP PoE neighbor is detected The columns hold the following information The screen in Figure 4 16 6 appears LLDP Neighbour Power Over Ethernet Information No PoE neighbour information found Auto refresh C Figure 4 16 6 LLDP PoE Neighbour screenshot Please be noticed that administrator has to enable LLDP port from LLDP configuration please refer to following example The screen in Figure 4 16 7 appears we enabled LLDP function from port1 ro port3 administrator has to plug a PD that supported PoE LLDP function and then administrator is going to see the PoE information of the PD form LLDP POrt statistics OVervieW a Port Thermal Protection LLDP Configuration Status Port Statistics Detail LLDP Parameters SFP Information Port Mirror Link Aggregation VLANS Spanning Tree gt Multicast QoS Access Control List Authentication Security MAC Address Table v LLDP Configuration LLDP MED Configuration LLDP MED Neighbours Neighbours Port Statistics LLDP EEE Neighbours Optional TLVs CDP aware Port Description System Name System Description System Capabilities Management Address v v v
445. sabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping For more detail information please refer to chapter 4 9 3 1 e DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification 177 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 3 1 QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification The clasification mode for tagged frames are configured on this page The QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification screen in Figure 4 9 3 appears Potl QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification Port 1 Tagged Frames Settings Tag Classification Disabled v PCP DEI to QoS class DP level Mapping Pcp DEI Qos dass DP level 1 v v O O 20 20 2 O 2 O 2 O O ai naf Gil Gy Ss l Sl Be bo BO l OI O Ol Oye Ol Ol Ol joio io D D 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 fd EIEI EIEI EIEI S SNS SNS NS SS SS SSS SS SS SS SNS Figure 4 9 3 QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification page screenshot The page includes the following fields 178 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Object Description e Tag Classification Controls the classificati
446. see A 65 4 22 13 Remote Syslog nisen te eel ie eed i eee aed aie ti eel in eee ete ae a E 66 4 2 14 LED PoOwWer Reduction snieni angna aaae aA ERENER E AEA Ea AE aa AE AANE A TR EENE AE se ATAA NRE AERE ETS 67 4 215 EEE Power Reduction sisii a inci 68 4 2 16 Thermal Protection PEPEE EE TE ET O A E A EA O E 69 4 2 17 Web Firmware Upa ea E A a A 70 4 2 18 FFTP Eirmware Upgrade siria iii shen Beeb a a a EE E E 71 4 2 19 Configuration Backup aicen nenn ap a a atp aa a aa a iaaa ad a a a aaier egaa atA aiina 72 4 2 20 Configuration Uploads tic a a a a aa a ide evans i 74 4 2 21 Factory Default dada 75 4221 System A E A a aT a R E R A RAE AA EAA AAA AEAT EEEE RANSE 76 4 3 Simple Network Management ProtoCol ssssssssseunenunseunnuunnunnnuunnunnnnunnnnunnuunnnnnnnunnnunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 78 4 D TSNMP O VervieW i nodi a e a a e as dd a eg a odo edo 78 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration ooooocccnnonccononocnnononcncnononnnnnnno corn nnn uantu rr r nn rre rre rre 79 4 3 3 SNMP System Information sico Ad te 81 4 3 4 SNMPy3 Configuration taba beens 82 4 3 4 1 SNMPv3 ComMunitiBS init indirectas 82 4374 2 SNMPVS USEMS a a tt ei EES 83 4 3 4 3 SNMPV3 Us a 85 4 34 14 SNMPV3 VICWS sists cette E AE E E E ee a EE A EE ee nh ee Reels 86 43 45 SNMPVS ACCESS ost A A da 87 4 4 Port Management iii aia chet paian 89 4 4 1 Port Configurador ti ad ecc ea ata felpa 89 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview a ia a A A O 91 4 4 3 Port Thermal Protecti
447. ser s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Set LLDP hold value in 10 WGSD 10020HP gt Ildp hold 10 LLDP Delay Description Set or show LLDP Tx delay Syntax LLDP Delay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt LLDP transmission delay 1 8192 Default Setting 2 Example Set LLDP delay value in 1 WGSD 10020HP gt Ildp delay 1 LLDP Reinit Description Set or show LLDP reinit delay Syntax LLDP Reinit lt reinit gt Parameters lt reinit gt LLDP reinit delay 1 10 Default Setting 2 454 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Set LLDP reinit delay value in 3 WGSD 10020HP gt Ildp reinit 3 LLDP Statistics Description Show LLDP Statistics Syntax LLDP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LLDP statistics Example Show LLDP Statistics of port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt Ildp statistics 1 LLDP global counters Neighbor entries was last changed at 18819 sec ago Total Neighbors Entries Added 0 Total Neighbors Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbors Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out 0 LLDP local counters Rx Tx Rx Rx Rx TLV RxTLV RxTLV Port Frames Frames Errors Discards Errors Unknown Organz Aged 455 LLDP Info Description Show LLDP neighbor device information Syntax LLDP Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_
448. series offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility The WGSD 10020 series supports standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and can be managed via any standard based management software For text based management the WGSD 10020 series can be accessed via Telnet and the console port Moreover the SGSW 24040HP offers secure remote management by supporting SSH SSL and SNMPv3 connection which encrypt the packet content at each session Powerful Security PLANET WGSD 10020 series offers comprehensive Layer 2 to Layer 4 Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge It can be used to restrict network access by denying packets based on source and destination IP address TCP UDP ports or defined typical network applications Its protection mechanism also comprises of 802 1x port based and MAC based user and device authentication With the private VLAN function communication between edge ports can be prevented to ensure user privacy The network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before The WGSD 10020 series net Security also provides DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection functions to prevent IP snooping from attack and discard ARP packets with invalid MAC address 21 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with considera
449. shot You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Header tags lt xml version 1 0 gt and lt configuration gt These tags are mandatory and must be present at the beginning of the file Section tags lt platform gt lt global gt and lt switch gt The platform section must be the first section tag and this section must include the correct platform ID and version The global section is optional and includes configuration which is not related to specific switch ports The switch section is optional and includes configuration which is related to specific switch ports Module tags lt ip gt lt mac gt lt port gt etc These tags identify a module controlling specific parts of the configuration Group tags lt port_table gt lt vlan_table gt etc These tags identify a group of parameters typically a table 72 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Parameter tags lt mode gt lt entry gt etc These tags identify parameters for the specific section module and group The lt entry gt tag is used for table entries Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values When saving the configuration from the switch the entire configuration including syntax descriptions is included in the file The file may then be modified using an editor and loaded to a switch The examples below shows a small configuration file only including configuratio
450. smitted e Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted e Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted The system capabilities identifies the primary function s of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled The information advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802 1AB e Mgmt Addr Buttons Save Click to save changes Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the switch If no management address is available the address should be the MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement The management address TLV may also include information about the specific interface associated with this address and an object identifier indicating the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 284 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 14 3 LLDPMED Configuration This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED The LLDPMED Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 2 appears LLDPMED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Fast start repeat count la Coordinates Location Civic Address Location Countr
451. sonal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 11i standard Wikipedia WPS is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Setup It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home network The goal of the WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless network Wikipedia WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore This is the time a fail on a resource has to be not active before restoration back to this previously failing resource is done 555 Y PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Conformi For the following equipment Type of Product WGSD 10020 Model Number 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Ethernet Switch Produced by Manufacturers Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 2006 A1 2007 Class A EN 61000 3 2 2006 A 1 2009 A 2 2009 EN 61000
452. spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following a One switch is elected as the root switch The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch E A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root a A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass th
453. specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian e Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance e Map Datum The Map Datum used for the coordinates given in this Option 286 Civic Address Location User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean
454. spection mode of port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network arp inspection port mode 1 Security Network ARP Inspection Entry Description Add or delete ARP inspection static entry Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_mac gt lt allowed_ip gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port ARP inspection static entry delete Delete existing port ARP inspection static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_mac gt MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx MAC address allowed for doing ARP request lt allowed_ip gt IP address a b c d IP address allowed for doing ARP request Example Add ARP inspection static entry WGSD 10020HP gt security network arp inspection entry 1 add 1 00 30 4f 00 00 11 192 168 0 11 Security Network ARP Inspection Status Description Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example 423 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries WGSD 10020HP gt security network arp inspection status Security AAA Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security AAA Configuration Example Show Auth configuration WGSD 10020HP gt security aaa configu
455. spective echo values shall be defined as the local link partners reflection echo of the remote link partners respective values When a local link partner receives its echoed values from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link partner has received registered and processed its most recent values For example if the local link partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its local MIB then the local link partner infers that the remote link partners request was based on stale information e Echo Rx Tw The link partner s Echo Rx Tw value e Resolved Tx Tw The resolved Tx Tw for this link Note NOT the link parther The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP 298 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Resolved Rx Tw The resolved Rx Tw for this link Note NOT the link parther The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 299 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 15 Network Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quick
456. ssigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Unknown The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and Active transmitted Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately clear J Clears the counters for the selected port 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration The IP Source Guard Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 10 appears 271 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series IP Source Guard Configuration Model Datel Y Port Mode Configuration Max Dynamic Clients SNS SS SN EIEI EEIEIIE SSN SN SS SSS SIS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Figure 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration screen page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of IP Sou
457. st gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Reopen port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network limit reopen 1 399 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network NAS Configuration Description Show 802 1X configuration Syntax Security Network NAS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show 802 1X configuration of port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas configuration 1 802 1X Configuration Disabled Disabled Reauth Period 3600 EAPOL Timeout 30 10 Disabled Disabled Disabled al Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Frame Seen Disabled Port Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID Force Authorized Globally Disabled Security Network NAS Mode Description Set or show the global NAS enabledness 400 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Syntax Security Network NAS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable 802 1X disable Globally disable 802 1X default Show current 802 1X global enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable IEEE802 1X function WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas mode enable Security Network NAS State Description Set or show the port security state Syntax Security Network NAS State lt port_list gt autojauthorized unauthorized single multi macbased Parameter
458. st or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application 4 10 1 Access Control List Status This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 10 1 appears ACL Status Combined x Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Copy CPU Once Conflict Auto refresh O Figure 4 10 1 ACL Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will matc
459. stem won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 4 2 18 TFTP Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network Before updating make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server The TFTP Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 22 appears TFTP Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IP Server IP it Senet File Name Figure 4 2 22 TFTP Firmware Update page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address 71 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series e Firmware File Name The name of firmware image Maximum length 24 characters Buttons Click to upgrade firmware DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the OK button after the image be loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware Note upgrade processes again 4 2 19 Configuration Backup This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Backup screen in Figure 4 2 23 appears Configuration Save Save configuration Figure 4 2 23 Configuration Save page screen
460. stp maxhops 25 STP MaxAge Description Set or show the bridge instance maximum age Syntax STP MaxAge lt max_age gt Parameters lt max_age gt STP maximum age time 6 40 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 20 Example Set STP maximum age time in 10 WGSD 10020HP gt stp maxage 10 STP FwdDelay Description Set or show the CIST MSTI bridge forward delay Syntax STP FwdDelay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt MSTP forward delay 4 30 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 15 Example 431 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Set STP forward delay value in 25 WGSD 10020HP gt stp fwddelay 25 STP CName Description Set or Show MSTP configuration name and revision Syntax STP CName lt config name gt lt integer gt Parameters lt config name gt MSTP Configuration name A text string up to 32 characters long Use quotes to embed spaces in name lt integer gt Integer value Default Setting Configuration name MAC address Configuration rev 0 Example Set MSTP configuration name and revision WGSD 10020HP gt stp cname 9f WGSD 10020 1 STP BPDU Filter Description Set or show edge port BPDU Filtering Syntax STP bpduFilter enable disable Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Filtering for Edge ports Default Setting Disable 432 User s Manual of WGSD 10020
461. switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screen in Figure 4 2 1 appears System Information Contact Name WGSD 10020HP Location MAC Address 00 30 4f 10 02 00 Time System Date 1970 01 01 700 02 42 00 00 System Uptime Od 00 02 42 Software Software Version Beta1108170851 Software Date 2011 08 17 08 51 21 0800 Auto refresh O Figure 4 2 1 System Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Contact The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact e Name The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name e Location The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location e MAC Address The MAC Address of this switch e System Date The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server if any e System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational e Software Version The software version of the switch e Software Date Buttons ni The date when the switch software was produced Auto refresh i i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone 49 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4
462. switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode Auto Speed Setup Auto negotiation 10 Half Force sets 10Mbps Half Duplex mode 10 Full Force sets 10Mbps Full Duplex mode 100 Half Force sets 100Mbps Half Duplex mode 100 Full Force sets 100Mbps Full Duplex mode 1000 Full Force sets 10000Mbps Full Duplex mode Disable Shutdown the port manually e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes e Excessive Collision Mode Configure port transmit collision behavior Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default Restart Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions e Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode param
463. t use the word last for lt qce_id_next gt Syntax QoS QCL Add lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_next gt lt port_list gt lt tag gt lt vid gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt lt smac gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt LLC lt DSAP gt lt SSAP gt lt control gt SNAP lt PID gt ipv4 lt protocol gt lt sip gt lt dscp gt lt fragment gt lt sport gt lt dport gt ipv6 lt protocol gt lt sip_v6 gt lt dscp gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt class gt lt dp gt lt classified_dscp gt Parameters lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID 489 lt qce_id_next gt lt port_list gt lt tag gt lt vid gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt lt smac gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lic lt dsap gt lt ssap gt lt control gt snap lt pid gt ipv4 lt protocol gt lt sip gt lt dscp gt lt fragment gt lt sport gt lt dport gt ipv6 lt sip_v6 gt lt class gt lt dp gt User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Next QCE ID next_id 1 256 or last Port List port lt port_list gt or all default All ports Frame tag untag tag any VID 1 4095 or any either a specific VID or range of VIDs Priority Code Point specific O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or any Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 or any Source MAC address xx xx xx or any
464. t Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Example Set the SNMP trap security engine ID WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap security engine id 800007e5017f000011 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name Description Set or show SNMP trap security name Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name lt security_name gt Parameters lt security_name gt A string representing the security name for a principal default Show SNMP trap security name The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Set the SNMP trap security name WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp trap security name 12345678 Security Switch SNMP Engine ID Description Set or show SNMPv3 local engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string 384 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default Setting 800007e5017f000001 Example Set 800007e5017f000002 for SNMPv3 local engine ID WGSD 10020HP gt security switch snmp engine id 800007e5017f000002 Security Switch SNMP Community Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 community entry The entry index key is lt community gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Add lt community gt lt ip_addr gt lt ip_m
465. t AgetiMe k iis ninni ninn ea a aaaea ie AEEA aaa 397 Sec rity Network Limit Port ariei a Getic detonate a a a ai 397 Security Network Limit Limit e a cece eens ee ena ee eeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseneeeeesaeeeeseaaeeeseeeeeeeeneeeesenaeeeeeenaes 398 Security Network LimitAction i icsccucr ite see eee eyes a dienes ee o tote 398 Security Network Limit REOPEN vivacidad 399 Security Network NAS ConfiguratiON ooooocccnnnnncnnoccccnnnonnncnonannnn nono tnut nn n nr nana n narrar rare 400 security NetworkNAS MOde ccoo ii 400 Security Network NAS Mate DAA 401 Security Network NAS Reauthentication oooooncninncccnnnoccccnononnnononcncnnnon cnn nono nn unnt n nn nn 402 Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod ccoo de lie 402 Security Network NAS EapolTiMeOUt ooooccccnnnncnnnoccccnnnoncncnononcnononnnnnn no nn nn nana n nn rn n rr rre narrar rre rre 403 Security Network NAS Agetime iis c eecue sec e 403 Security Network NAS Holdtime i s snus cebecen peed aeoened picnic 404 Security Network NAS RADIUS_Q0S 00 eeeeee cence erent ee eeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeneeeeesaaeeeseeaaeeeseeeaeeeenaeeeesenaeeeeeenaees 404 Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN 00 0 cece eeeeceeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeaeeeseeeeeeesnaeeeseenaeeeenenaees 405 Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN 0 0 ee ceceeceeeceee seer ee eeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeseeaaeeeeeneaeeesnaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaees 406 Security Network NAS Authenticate oooooo
466. t Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class Fore example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class II also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class 1 and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class II and Generic Endpoints Class l LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class 1 The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class Il The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of t
467. t bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 139 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series LAN 1 w Port cost 200 000 A vor Bridge ID 15 Port 2 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B E c Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 A LAN 2 _ gt A LAN 3 _ gt Figure 4 7 5 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used A C Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port c Designated Bridge A LAN 2 _ gt A AN3 ___ gt Figure 4 7 6 After Applying the STA Rules 140 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be us
468. t dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 1 QoS Port Classification DSCP Description Set or show if the classification is based on DSCP value in IP frames Syntax QoS Port Classification DSCP lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable DSCP based classification disable Disable DSCP based classification default Show DSCP based classification mode Default Setting disable 476 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Enable QoS port classification DSCP WGSD 10020HP gt qos Port Classification dscp 1 10 enable QoS Port Policer Mode Description Set or show the port policer mode Syntax QoS Port Policer Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port policer disable Disable port policer default Show port policer mode Default Setting disable Example Enable QoS port policer WGSD 10020HP gt q0s Port Policer Mode 1 10 enable QoS Port Policer Rate Description Set or show the port policer rate Syntax QoS Port Policer Rate lt port_list gt lt rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt rate gt Rate in kbps or fps 100 15000000 477 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default Setting 500 Example Set the port policer rate in 1000 WGSD 10020HP
469. t gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS authentication server configuration enable Enable RADIUS authentication server disable Disable RADIUS authentication server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port 1812 Example Set RADIUS authentication server configuration 426 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt security aaa radius 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 1812 Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS accounting server setup Syntax Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS accounting server configuration enable Enable RADIUS accounting server disable Disable RADIUS accounting server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external accounting server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Q
470. t or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP point2point disable Disable MSTP point2point auto Automatic MSTP point2point detection 438 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Default auto Example Disable STP P2P function on port WGSD 10020HP gt stp port p2p 1 disable STP Port RestrictedRole Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedRole port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedRole lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP restricted role disable Disable MSTP restricted role Default disable Example Eisable STP restricted role on portt WGSD 10020HP gt stp port restrictedrole 1 enable STP Port RestrictedTcn Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedTcn port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedTcn lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 439 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series enable Enable MSTP restricted TCN disable Disable MSTP restricted TCN Default disable Example Eisable STP restricted TCN on port1 WGSD 10020HP gt stp port restrictedtcn 1 enable STP Port bpduGuard Description Set or show the bpduGuard port parameter Syntax STP Port bpduGuard lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable po
471. t status Default Setting disable QoS DSCP Classification Mode Description Set or show DSCP ingress classification mode If port DSCP classification is selected DSCP will be classified based on QoS class and DP level only for DSCP value with classification mode enabled DSCP may be translated DSCP if translation is enabled for the port Syntax QoS DSCP Classification Mode lt dscp_list gt enable disable Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all enable Enable DSCP ingress classification disable Disable DSCP ingress classification default Show DSCP classification mode 487 Default Setting disable QoS DSCP EgressRemap Description User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Set or show DSCP egress remap table This table is used if the port egress remarking mode is remap and the purpose is to map the DSCP and DP level to a new DSCP value Syntax QoS DSCP EgressRemap lt dscp_list gt lt dpl_list gt lt dscp gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all lt dpl_list gt DP level list or all default All DP levels 0 1 lt dscp gt Egress remapped DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 QoS Storm Unicast Description Set or show the unicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Unicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable unicast storm con
472. t the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting MW Switch does not power up Solution 1 AC power cord not inserted or faulty 2 Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord If the cord is inserted correctly check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 534 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power E while IP Address be changed or forgotten admin password To reset the IP address to the default IP Address 192 168 0 100 or reset the password to default value Press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx A 1000 INK ACT Y 10 100 INK ACT mini GBIC TS A 84 r o voO a 2 3 O CU OA a 8 RESET Reset 535 A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T BI_DA BI_DA BI_DB BI_DC BI_DC BI_DB BI_DD N OO RA ORP BI_DD BI_DB BI_DB BI_DA BI_DD BI_DD BI_DA BI_DC BI_DC User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series APPENDEX A Implicit implementati
473. tax Security Switch Access lpv6 Add lt access_id gt lt start_ipv6_addr gt lt end_ipv6_addr gt web snmp telnet Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ipv6_addr gt Start IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt end_ipv6_addr gt End IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 web Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS snmp Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP telnet Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH Example Add access management list from 2001 0001 to 2001 0100 via web interface 373 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Switch Access Delete Descripti
474. tch any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled e Logging Indicates the logging operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE Possible values are
475. ter Disabled v Port Copy Disabled v Disabled v Logging Disabled v Disabled v Counter 0 VLAN Parameters 802 10 Tagged VLAN ID Filter Figure 4 10 3 ACE Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port Policy n The ACE applies to this policy number where n can range from 1 through 8 e Frame Type Select the frame type for this ACE These frame types are mutually exclusive Any Any frame can match this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE The IEEE 802 3 describes the value of Length Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal equal to 0600 hexadecimal ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE Notice the ARP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv4 frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type IPv6 Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv6 frames won t match the ACE with ehternet type 205 e Action User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped
476. ter the last entry currently displayed 281 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 14 LLDP 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 4 14 2 LLDP Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters Tx Interval Tx Hold Tx Delay Tx Reinit Optional TLYs Port Description System Name
477. ters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box e P Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server e Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Buttons Save Click to save changes Authentication Server and the switch Reset_ Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 242 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 11 7 RADIUS Overview This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration page The RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 8 appears RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview Te adres 0 0 0 0 1612 Disable 0 0 0 0 1612 Disable 0 0 0 0 1812 Disable 0 0 0 0 1812 Disable 0 0 0 0 1812 Disable RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overv
478. tesGudssatadecseqssstepeasteages 309 4 16 4 PoE Status ii A ee ee es 311 416 5 POE Schedules 0 ast etn ae earn pitied te Sie Ai eae dea ue da ee Dae a a aa 312 4 16 6 LLDP PoE NeighbDous cccccecececeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseceseceeceaeceaeceaecaaesceeeesseeeceecaeseaesaesaeeseesaeeseeseseseeesereeeeseeeaes 314 AAG 7 PD Alvie CheCk 42 22 20 a heed eae aed Shee ated ude Die aoe dl eg o 315 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE c mica 317 5 V Accessing the CL ccs ii A dan 317 Logon to the Console vivacidad 317 Configure IP Address cuicos na peueane co shea a aa p a aana iaaa aa a aa a at noo dpi 318 522 Telmet LOUIN oia anaa Ena ea ae a aaa EA Aaa E a a aaa AE 320 6 Command Line Mode savia 321 6 1 System Command A a aa a aa e oa Ta a eo aae danant 321 System Configuration isen A ee 321 System Log Configuration ss heeii ae g A a a pis 322 System A E A AAE EaR eaaa AE ESEA ENAR EE 323 System Log Server Mode iii tt 323 System Na id E aai 324 System Contacte a eel neces ioe E A a A ET te 324 System Log Server Address iian eoii e ia a eai i 325 System M Roler ilele RERA TIRET TE TS E A T TS A TEE 325 System Log Level in inng a E E enn eee ee ae 326 System TIMEZONE sirkesi nap e e a a aa a a aa a a e thes a a aaa evar eve 326 System Log ILOOKUP cuotas ai aa 327 SVEEN REDOOb s cr cect Seite a ad tas e ad o AO 328 System Restore Detalla ae 328 SYSTEM LOAM ii a ea 328 62 1P COMMAN ig ceca cs re ee araea a Eiane 330 IP C
479. the Guest VLAN Use the global keyword to change it default Show current Guest VLAN ID lt reauth_max gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command The number of times a Request Identity EAPOL frame is sent without reasponse before considering entering the Guest VLAN default Show current Maximum Reauth Count value lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command disable The Guest VLAN can only be entered if no EAPOL frames have been received on a port for the lifetime of the port enable The Guest VLAN can be entered even if an EAPOL frame has been received during the lifetime of the port default Show current setting Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS guest VLAN WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas guest_vlan enable Security Network NAS Authenticate Description Refresh restart 802 1X authentication process 406 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Syntax Security Network NAS Authenticate lt port_list gt now Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports now Force reauthentication immediately Example Start NAS authentication now for port 1 WGSD 10020HP gt security network nas authenticate 1 now Security Network NAS Siatistics Description Show or clear 802 1X statistics Syntax Security Network NAS Statistics lt p
480. the IPMC snooping querier mode for VLAN Syntax IPMC Querier mld igmp lt vid gt enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs enable Enable MLD querier disable Disable MLD querier Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP querier for VLAN 1 WGSD 10020HP gt ipmc querier igmp 1 enable 514 IPMC Fastleave Description Set or show the IPMC snooping fast leave port mode Syntax IPMC Fastleave mld igmp lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MLD fast leave disable Disable MLD fast leave default Show IPMC fast leave mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP fast leave for all port User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt ipme fastleave igmp 1 10 enable IPMC Throttling Description Set or show the IPMC port throttling status Syntax IPMC Throttling mld igmp lt port_list gt limit_group_number Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 0 No limit 1 10 Group learn limit 515 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series default Show IPMC Port Throttling Default Setting Unlimited Example S
481. the VLAN ID e Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry Buttons Auto refresh Cl Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 131 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 6 13 Protocol based VLAN This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the switch The Protocol based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 19 appears Protocol to Group Mapping Table Auto refresh C Figure 4 6 19 Protocol to Group Mapping Table page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid value in
482. the access management entry e HTTP HTTPS Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface that the host IP address matched the entry e SNMP Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface that the host IP address matched the entry e TELNET SSH Buttons Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface that the host IP address matched the entry Ada new entry Click to add a new access management entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics This page provides statistics for access management The Access Management Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 3 appears 263 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Access Management Statistics Receive Packets Allow Packets Discard Packets D O 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 Auto Refresh O Figure 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The interface that allowed remote host can access the switch e Receive Packets The received packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Allow Packets The allowed packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Discard Packets The discarded packets number from the interface under access
483. the page any changes made locally will be undone 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 5 appears 214 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series ACL Rate Limiter Configuration pa 0 410 M1 Q0N _ h ho h uy E ag v v vw v v v v v v v v v v v v v pre PES pr BES PES pre pre pr pr pr pre pr pr pre pre pr 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 mn Figure 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter 1D for the settings contained in the same row e Rate The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or 0 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps e Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are pps packets per second kbps Kbits per second Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 215 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 11 Authentication This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Authentication section contains links to the following ma
484. tication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software 216 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone and only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options m Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS m Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS m Local user name and Priviledge Level control RADIUS and TACACS are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Managed Switch 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized
485. ting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media e Policy Policy Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown 293 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Defined The network policy is defined e TAG TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged ot Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of eight priority levels 0 through 7 DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specifi
486. tion Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD Inventory NO oO A ODN Reserved e Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The poosible application types are shown below Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications suppor
487. tion screen in Figure 4 9 2 appears QoS Ingress Port Classification DP level PCP DEI Tag Class DSCP Based Ov Ov Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled kh lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt o lt OOOOOOO000 2 3 4 5 6 Ov OW Om lO 8 9 0 o lt o lt o lt o lt Figure 4 9 2 QoS Ingress Port Classification page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e QoS Class Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority e DP Level Controls the default DP level i e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way e PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames e DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames e Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Di
488. tion RST value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care m Ethernet Type Parameters e TCP URG Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected Object Description e EtherType Filter Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can
489. titude north south west east meters floor coordinate_value Parameters latitude Latitude 0 to 90 degress with max 4 digits Positive numbers are north of the equator and negative numbers are south of the equator longitude Longitude 0 to 180 degress with max 4 digits Positive values are East of the prime meridian and negative numbers are West of the prime meridian altitude Altitude Meters or floors with max 4 digits default Show coordinate location configuration north south west east meters floor North North Valid for latitude South South Valid for latitude West West Valid for longitude East East Valid for longitude Meters Meters Valid for altitude Floor Floor Valid for altitude lldpmed Coordinate value coordinate_value lldpmed Coordinate value LLDPMED Datum Description Set or show LLDP MED Coordinates map datum Syntax LLDPMED Datum wgs84 nad83_navd88 nad83_mllw Parameters wgs84 nad83_navd88 nad83_mllw wgs84 WGS84 nad83_navd88 NAD83_NAVD88 nad83_mllw NAD83_MLLW lldpmed Coordinate datum 461 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series LLDPMED Fast Description Set or show LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Syntax LLDPMED Fast lt count gt Parameters lt count gt The number of times the fast start LLDPDU are being sent during the activation of the fast start mechanism defined by LLDP MED 1 10 LLDPMED Info Description Show LLDP MED
490. to free any resources is to age the entry e Hold Time e This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses a Single 802 1X E Multi 802 1X E MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication 223 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS
491. trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and 261 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the stack or elect a new masterthe switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the stackswitch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken e State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown e Reopen Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it
492. trol disable Disable unicast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in fps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k Default Setting disable Example Enable unicast storm control in 2fps 32768k WGSD 10020HP gt QoS Storm Unicast enable 2 488 QoS Storm Multicast Description Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Multicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable multicast storm control disable Disable multicast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in fps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 32768k Default Setting disable Example Enable multicast storm control in 2fps User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt QoS Storm multicast enable 2 QoS QCL Add Description Add or modify QoS Control Entry QCE If the QCE ID parameter lt qce_id gt is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists the QCE will be modified Otherwise a new QCE will be added If the QCE ID is not specified the next available QCE ID will be used If the next QCE ID parameter lt qce_id_next gt is specified the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list If the next QCE ID is not specified and if it is a new entry added the QCE will be placed last in the list Otherwise if the next QCE ID is not specified and if existing QCE is modified QCE will be in the same location in the list To modify and move the entry to last in the lis
493. tting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet 108 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header HM 802 10 VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes Preamble Destination Source VLAN TAG Ethernet Data FCS Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted
494. ual of WGSD 10020 Series Description e Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP e Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 e Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 e Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops e Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Object The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delay
495. udes the user access and management control The Security page contains links to the following main topics E Port Limit Control E Access Management E HTTPs SSH E DHCP Snooping E IP Source Guard a ARP Inspection 4 12 1 Port Limit Control This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of the four different actions as described below The Limit Control module utilizes a lower layer module Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learnt on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Port Limit Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 1 appears 259 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Port Security Limit Control Configuration System Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 2 3 4 5 6 l 8 9 0 Figure 4 12 1 Port Limit Control Configuration Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object D
496. ues 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address The MAC Address Table screen in Figure 4 13 2 appears MAC Address Table Start from VLAN I and MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 entries per page Port Members A E ve vian mac address ceula 2 a 4 s 6 7 9 s0 Static 00 30 4F 10 02 00 Static 33 33 FF 10 02 00 y Static 33 33 FF A8 00 64 Y Dynamic 40 61 86 04 18 69 Y static FF FF FF FF FF FF Y Y Y vv VY VV VV Vv Figure 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Navigating the MAC Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entr
497. uld just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are stack global The MSTI Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 12 amp Figure 4 7 13appears MSTI Port Configuration Select MSTI MSTI M Ger Figure 4 7 12 MSTI Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Select MSTI Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration 149 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series MST1 MSTI Port Configuration MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration th Cost MSTI Normal Ports Configuration Port Path Cost lt 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 LS ESI ES S SS SS KESI S ES ESI IS IS ak Figu
498. uotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port 1813 Example Set RADIUS accounting server configuration WGSD 10020HP gt security acct_radius 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 1813 Security AAA TACACS Description Set or show TACACS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA TACACS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 427 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series default Show TACACS authentication server configuration enable Enable TACACS authentication server disable Disable TACACS authentication server default Show TACACS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server TCP port Use 0 to use the default TACACS port 49 Example Set TACACS authentication server configuration WGSD 10020HP gt security aaa tacacs 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 49 Security AAA Statistics Description Show RADIUS statistics Syntax Security AAA Statistics lt server_index gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show statistics for all servers Examp
499. up WGSD 10020HP gt security switch privilege level group mvr 15 15 15 15 Security Switch Privilege Level Current Description Show the current privilege level Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Current Default Setting 15 Security Switch Auth Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security Switch Auth Configuration Example Show authentication configuration WGSD 10020HP gt security switch auth configuration Auth Configuration Authentication Method Local Authentication Fallback 366 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Security Switch Auth Method Description Set or show Auth method default Show Auth method Syntax Security Switch Auth Method console telnet ssh web none local radius tacacs enable disable Parameters console Settings for console telnet Settings for telnet ssh Settings for ssh web Settings for web default Set or show the specific client authentication method none Authentication disabled local Use local authentication radius Use remote RADIUS authentication tacacs Use remote TACACS authentication default Show client authentication method enable Enable local authentication if remote authentication fails disable Disable local authentication if remote authentication fails The parameter is effective when it is typed Default Setting disable Examp
500. ure 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status for Static User page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Port Members The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users is selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is the default VLAN membership allows the frames Classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded to the respective VLAN 117 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series member ports e VLAN User A VLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN CLI Web SNMP This are reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVRis used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only ona single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which si
501. ure 4 8 12 appears MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Start from WLAN 1 with 20 entries per page LAN ID Snooping Enabled MLD Querier RY QI sec ORI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URI sec Figure 4 8 12 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MLD Snooping Enable Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected e MLD Querier Enable the MLD Querier in the VLAN e RV Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a link The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 e Qi Query Interval The Query Interval variable denotes the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 255 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds e QRI Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the 166 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds e LLQI Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Mu
502. us isisisi etie an 131 4 6 13 Protocol based VLAN cin a 132 4 6 14 Protocol based VLAN Mambership ooooccccococccnnococonononcnonononcnononnnnnnno nn rr nano nn ran nr n rre rre 133 4 7 Spanning Tree Protocol iii e a era ea Siete tea tcbe cues ce e a aoe debe eE a aeaiee aaae oada asaan 135 AEA TNC ORY E E E A E E T 135 4 6 2 STP System Configuratio N ci a 141 4 7 3 Bdge Status iinei a eai uae ube i e aaae e a e a a a eae aa i 143 4 7 4 CIST Port Configuration nen a a a n Aa A R steed A A E A A a AAS A RE AA A A A AE Ea aae 144 45725 MST POE uti ates Pied a ti Reseed a tana te oa a dodo do ad 147 ALTO MS PIIGonmiguration sss 2eceenccten hist concen cecke Nad 2a veunedat A aaa 147 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration si ssc neue aiii 149 A A tise ecg toca he a Satea teenie ak ite bd tae toe betuanie ele West tee Be et oe et doe tee 151 4 19 POrt Statistics ina ado 152 4 39 MulticaS toi ill ltd ileso 154 4 8 1 I6MPSNOOPINO ia A dada 154 4 8 2 IGMP Snooping Configuration cioominoiicia e id 158 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping VLAN ConfiguratiON ooccconnnnnnnoccccnononcncnononnnn nono ncnn no nn rr nano nn rn rn nr 159 4 8 4 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering riiit aiei aiea taaie rra 160 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping MUS asin 161 4 8 6 IGMP G ro p Inf tmati o Nseries okie in ici 163 4 8 7 IGMPV3 Inf ormatio Nirn i n e a o d ee a a e Aiai 163 4 8 8 MLD Snooping Configuration ee ceeeesneee cence eeeneeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeee
503. us igmp 1 IPMC Group Description Show IPMC group addresses accordingly Syntax IPMC Groups mld igmp lt vid gt Parameters 517 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN 1 IPMC group addresses accordingly WGSD 10020HP gt ipmc groups igmp 1 IPMC Version Description Show IPMC Versions Syntax IPMC Version mldligmp lt vid gt Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN 1 IPMC Versions WGSD 10020HP gt ipme version igmp 1 IPMC SSM Description Show SSM related information for IPMC Syntax IPMC SSM mld igmp lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters mld igmp 518 mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show VLAN 1 amp port 1 10 SSM related information for IPMC User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt ipmcssm igmp 1 1 10 IPMC Parameter RV Description Set or show the IPMC Robustness Variable Syntax IPMC Parameter RV mldligmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_rv Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP
504. uthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds e Last Authentication Buttons Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately _ clear This button is available in the following modes e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X 238 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Click to clear the counters for the selected port Clear All This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth X Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client s counters The Last Client will not be cleared however _ Clear This This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth X Click to clear only the currently selected client s counters 239 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 11 6 Authentication Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the Authentication Servers The Authentication Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 7 appears Authentication Server Configu
505. uthentication Server Configuration cccceeecceeeneeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeseeeaeeeeneeeesenaeeeeeeaaees 240 4 11 7 RADIUS Overview E E A A E ninas 243 4 11 8 RADIUS Details 22 24 2005 n e e eE a ae deena EEE EEEE E Ea aa RE dee ete 244 4 11 9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configurati0N ooocononccnnonoconnnoccncnononnnn nono conan nnnn nono rca 251 4 11 10 802 1X Client ConfiguratiOn esicoiirraaa tes 256 AP racks ssccucccece saisk sneceecueseocess E cguaus guid ssdedvaaaeecetuctaastessessedeedecd 259 4 12 1 Port Limit CONTO eii a A a 259 4 12 2 Access Manage Medi ade 262 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics oooonnnocccinnnccnnnncccnnnonnncnnnannnnnorncnnn nn r rr nono nn n nr 263 ALA HTTP Sd e e e do n can dl tot aaa ole do dado 264 NS yeh hel dea Med A O EN te ent Mee dT 265 4 12 60 Port Security Status eo discs 266 4 12 7 Port Security Detail socio nica 268 4 12 8 DACP SNOOPING nervion aaa 269 4 12 9 DHEP Snooping Statistics ico dude teedtuck a Sayeed bc ey vaecec tastes E ids deeded be testes eects a 270 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration ea 271 4 12 11 1P Source Guard Static Table zinani in eaa anaa aten 273 4 12 12 ARP Inspection A dica 273 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Static Table ooooooonnnnccnnnocicononcccnononnnononancnnnorn cc nn no nn r rra non rn rre 275 CAETANO 276 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration oooooccononinnnoncccnnnonnnononancnnnonncnnn no cnn rnnnn
506. ve Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 9 8 DSCP Based QoS This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches The DSCP Based QoS screen in Figure 4 9 10 appears DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification o5 OF low ow 1 O Ov Ov 2 O Ov Ov 3 O Ov Ov 4 oO Ov Ov 5 O Ov ov 6 O ov ov 7 O Ov Ov a cs1 O 0 ov 9 O Ov Ov 10 O Ov Ov 11 O Ov Ov 12 O Ov Ov 13 O ov Ov 14 DO pa ow 15 O Ov ov 16 CS2 O Ov ov ii O ov Ov 18 O 0 Ov 19 O Ov Ov 20 O Ov Ov 21 O Ov Ov 22 O 0 v ov 23 O Ov Ov 185 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series meee SB BBB BS o oj oj jo jojjo joj jjo jo o o ojjojjo jojjojjo o ojjoj jo o o jojjo o jo jojjo jo jojjoj jo e828 p oj o j o Eales ea ees a en nef a a fea ale safe E PRR eee ee ool 2 Refiesh Auto refresh O Figure 4 9 10 DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification page screenshot 186 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series The page includes the following fields Object Description
507. vice LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The LACP Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 4 appears LACP Port Configuration 1 Auto Active v Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto EEE 8 8 8 IS ES S ES EIE fey fey eb fey fee fe 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 Auto Figure 4 5 4 LACP Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack e Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with
508. voice valn agetime 100 506 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Voice VLAN Traffic Class Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN Traffic Class lt class gt Parameters lt class gt Traffic class 0 7 Default Setting 7 Example Set 4 traffic class for voice VLAN WGSD 10020HP gt voice vian traffic class4 Voice VLAN OUI Add Description Add Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process The maximum entry number is 16 Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Add lt oui_addr gt lt description gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx The null OUI address isn t allowed lt description gt Entry description Use clear or to clear the string No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact only in CLI Example Add Voice VLAN OUI entry WGSD 10020HP gt voice vian oui add 00 11 22 test 507 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Voice VLAN OUI Delete Description Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Delete lt oui_addr gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx The null OUI address isn t allowed Example Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry WGSD 10020HP gt voice vian oui delete 00 11 22 Voice VLAN OUI Clear Description Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax
509. w Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link Enabled Disabled Disabled Discard Enabled Disabled Disabled Discard Enabled Disabled Disabled Discard Enabled Disabled Disabled Discard Port Mode Description Set or show the port speed and duplex mode Syntax Port Mode lt port_list gt auto 1Ohdx 10fdx 100hdx 100fdx 1000fdx 339 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Auto negotiation of speed and duplex 10hdx 10 Mbps half duplex 10fdx 10 Mbps full duplex 100hdx 100 Mbps half duplex 100fdx 100 Mbps full duplex 1000fdx 1 Gbps full duplex default Show configured and current mode Default Setting Auto Example Set 10Mbps half duplex speed for port1 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt port mode 1 10hdx Port Flow Control Description Set or show the port flow control mode Syntax Port Flow Control lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable flow control disable Disable flow control default Show flow control mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable flow control function for port1 WGSD 10020HP gt port flow control 1 enable 340 Port State Description Set or show the port administrative state Syntax Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default
510. warding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN The Port Isolation screen in Figure 4 6 7 appears 122 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 111 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Figure 4 6 7 Port Isolation Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 6 10 VLAN setting example Separate VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Trunk Port Isolate 4 6 10 1 Two separate 802 1Q VLAN The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handle Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLAN Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 6 8 appears and Table 4 6 9 describes the port configuration of the Managed Switches 123 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series
511. with relay agent information option e Drop Agent Option The packets number that dropped received packets with relay agent information option Buttons Auto refresh H Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh clear J Clear all statistics Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone 62 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 2 10 CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samles are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG The CPU Load screen in Figure 4 2 13 appears CPU Load Auto refresh Y 100ms 3 1sec 1 10sec 1 all numbers running average 13 50 25 a LIA ls at WI A A Figure 4 2 13 CPU Load page screenshot Buttons Auto refresh d Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals If your browser can not displies anythings in this page please download Adobe SVG tool and install it in your computer 63 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 4 2 11 System Log The switch system log
512. x IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add lt server_index gt lt server_ipv6 gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt server_ipv6 gt Pv6 server address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Example To add IPv6 NTP server WGSD 10020HP gt ip ntp server ipv6 add 1 2001 7b8 3 2c 123 IP NTP Server Delete Description Delete NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Delete lt server_index gt Parameters 337 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 Example To delete NTP server WGSD 10020HP gt ip ntp server delete 1 338 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 6 3 Port Management Command Port Configuration Description Show port configuration Syntax Port Configuration lt port_list gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down default Show all ports Example Display port1 4 status WGSD 10020HP gt port configuration 1 4 Port Configuration Flo
513. xample Enable the limit mode User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series WGSD 10020HP gt security network limit mode enable Security Network Limit Aging Description Set or show aging enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Aging enable disable Parameters enable Enable aging 396 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series disable Disable aging default Show current enabledness of aging Default Setting disable Example Enable limit aging WGSD 10020HP gt security network limit aging enable Security Network Limit Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on learned MAC addresses Syntax Security Network Limit Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time in seconds between checks for activity on a MAC address 10 10000000 seconds default Show current age time Default Setting 3600 Example Set age time in 100sec WGSD 10020HP gt security network limit agetime 100 Security Network Limit Port Description Set or show per port enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Port lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 397 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series enable Enable port security on this port disable Disable port security on this port default Show current port enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable Exa
514. y code Landmark Postal community name L Leading suree direcion ose no ional location int Room no ro mos House no sui Additional code i i Emergency Call Service Policies Policy Port Configuration Figure 4 14 2 LLDPMED Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to 285 Coordinates Location Object User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series
515. y gt Parameters lt hour gt The hour 0 24 at which to change LEDs intensity lt intensity gt The LED intensity in 0 100 Example Show the time and intensity for the LEDs WGSD 10020HP gt led_power timer Time Intensity LED Power Delete Timer Description Deletes a timer Syntax led_power delete_timer lt hour gt Parameters lt hour gt The hour 0 24 at which to change LEDs intensity 471 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series LED Power Maintenance Description Set or show the maintenance settings Syntax led_power maintenance lt maintenance_time gt on_at_errors leave_at_errors Parameters lt maintenance_time gt Time in seconds 0 65535 that the LEDs shall be turned on when any port changes link state on_at_errors leave_at_errors on_at_error if LEDs shall be turned on if any errors has been detected leave_at_errors if no LED change shall happen when errors have been detected LED Power Configuration Description Show Led Power Reduction configuration Syntax led_power configuration 472 6 17 Quality of Service Command QoS Configuration Description Show QoS Configuration Syntax QoS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports QoS Port Classification Class Description Set or show the default QoS class Syntax QoS Port Cl
516. y of the currently displayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text no more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields 278 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Object Description e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields cier J Flushes all dynamic entries Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 13 3 appears Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Start from Port v VLAN 1 MAC address 100 00 00 00 00 00 and IP address 0 0 0 0 w
517. y the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear e Sender IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation e Sender IP Mask When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation e Target IP Filter Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear e Target IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation e Target IP Mask When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation e ARP SMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e RARP SMAC Match Specify wheth
518. y used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network The Switch performs Store and forward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur 527 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 7 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mode If attached device is 100Base TX port will set to 10Mbps with auto negotiation 10 20Mbps 10Base T Full Duplex 100Mbps no auto negotiation 100Mbps 100Mbps with auto negotiation 100 200Mbps 100Base TX Full Duplex 528 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series 8 POWER OVER ETHERNET OVERVIEW What is PoE Based on the global standard IEEE 802 3af PoE is a technology for wired Ethernet the most widely installed local area network technology adopted today PoE allows the electrical power necessary for the operation of each end device to be carried by data cables rather than by separate power cords New netwo
519. y with this ACE ID already exists the ACE will be modified Otherwise a new ACE will be added If the ACE ID is not specified the next available ACE ID will be used If the next ACE ID parameter lt ace_id_next gt is specified the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list If the next ACE ID is not specified the ACE will be placed last in the list If the Switch keyword is used the rule applies to all ports If the Port keyword is used the rule applies to the specified port only If the Policy keyword is used the rule applies to all ports configured with the specified policy The default is that the rule applies to all ports Syntax Security Network ACL Add lt ace_id gt lt ace_id_next gt switch port lt port_list gt policy lt policy gt lt tagged gt lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt smac gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt ip lt sip gt lt dip gt lt protocol gt lt ip_flags gt icmp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt lt ip_flags gt udp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt tcp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt lt tcp_flags gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_copy gt lt mirror gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Par
520. ynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries WGSD 10020HP gt security network ip source guard status Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Description Show ARP inspection configuration Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Example Show ARP inspection configuration 421 WGSD 10020HP gt security network arp inspection configuration User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Security Network ARP Inspection Mode Description Set or show ARP inspection mode Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable ARP Inspection disable Disable ARP Inspection Default Setting disable Example Enable ARP inspection mode WGSD 10020HP gt security network arp inspection mode enable Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode Description Set or show the ARP Inspection port mode Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable ARP Inspection port disable Disable ARP Inspection port default Show ARP Inspection port mode Default Setting Disable 422 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series Example Enable the ARP in
521. yntax MAC Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 0 10 1000000 O disable default Show age time Default Setting 300 Example Set agetime value in 30 WGSD 10020HP gt mac agetime 30 MAC Learning Description Set or show the port learn mode Syntax MAC Learning lt port_list gt auto disable secure Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 347 User s Manual of WGSD 10020 Series auto Automatic learning disable Disable learning secure Secure learning default Show learn mode Default Setting Auto Example Set secure learning mode in port1 WGSD 10020HP gt mac learning 1 secure MAC Dump Description Show sorted list of MAC address entries Syntax MAC Dump lt mac_max gt lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_max gt Maximum number of MAC addresses 1 8192 default Show all addresses lt mac_addr gt First MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx default MAC address zero lt vid gt First VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Show all of MAC table WGSD 10020HP gt mac dump Type VID MAC Address 00 30 00 33 22 55 1 00 30 4f 24 04 d1 None CPU 33 33 ff 24 04 d1 None CPU 33 33 ff a8 00 64 None CPU 40 61 86 04 18 69 10 ff ff ff ff ff ff 1 24 CPU 348 MAC Statistics Description Show MAC address table statistics Syntax MAC Statistics lt port_list gt

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  4big Quadra Benutzerhandbuch  Page 1 Page 2 御利用頂く 前に、 必ずこの取扱説明書をお読み下さいま  Samsung 914V Computer Monitor User Manual    Testing Accommodations and 504 Plans User Manual Version 2.3  F Mortiers pour joints CG2 - Hansez    Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR OS User's Manual  Motörheadphönes Bomber  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file